RNC Hardware Description

RNC V100R010
Hardware Description
Issue Date Part Number
03 2008-08-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
RNC Hardware Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Hardware Overview...................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 RNC Hardware Components...........................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 RNC Hardware Configuration........................................................................................................................1-3
2 WRSR Cabinet............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets.........................................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet.................................................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22)........................................................................................2-4 2.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N)....................................................................................2-7 2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box.......................................................................................................................2-10 2.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box.................................................................................2-11 2.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box...........................................................2-11 2.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box.................................................................................2-12 2.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution Boxes.............................................................2-13 2.4 Switcher.........................................................................................................................................................2-14 2.5 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................2-15 2.6 GRU Suite.....................................................................................................................................................2-16 2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU Suite..............................................................................................................2-17 2.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite.........................................................................................2-18 2.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite..........................................................................................2-18 2.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU Suite...............................................................................................................2-19 2.7 Optical Cable Tray........................................................................................................................................2-19 2.8 Cable Tray.....................................................................................................................................................2-19 2.9 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................2-20 2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G).........................................................................................................................2-20 2.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)....................................................................................................................2-25 2.10 BAM Server ...............................................................................................................................................2-31 2.10.1 Functions of BAM..............................................................................................................................2-32 2.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)................................................................................2-33 2.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)...........................................................................2-37 2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR Cabinet...................................................................................................2-40 2.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR Cabinet.............................................................................2-40 Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd i
Contents
RNC Hardware Description 2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSR Cabinet..........................................2-41 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.........................................................................2-45
2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR Cabinet....................................................................................2-71
3 WRBR Cabinet............................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets.........................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet................................................................................................................3-2 3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22).......................................................................................3-2 3.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N)...................................................................................3-4 3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR Cabinet......................................................................................................3-6 3.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR Cabinet................................................................................3-6 3.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBR Cabinet..............................................3-7 3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet............................................................................3-9 3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR Cabinet......................................................................................3-14
4 WRSS Subrack............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Components of the WRSS Subrack................................................................................................................4-3 4.2 Fan Drawer......................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack..........................................................................................................................4-5 4.4 Inter-Subrack Connection...............................................................................................................................4-6 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough................................................................................................................................4-7 4.6 Air Inlets..........................................................................................................................................................4-7 4.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS Subrack........................................................................................4-7
5 WRBS Subrack............................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Components of the WRBS Subrack................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Boards in the WRBS Subrack.........................................................................................................................5-3 5.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS Subrack........................................................................................5-5
6 RNC Boards.................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 RNC Board Compatibility...............................................................................................................................6-4 6.2 WBIE/WBIEb Board.......................................................................................................................................6-5 6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb Board.........................................................................................................6-5 6.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board........................................................................................................6-6 6.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.........................................................................................................6-7 6.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board............................................................................................6-8 6.3 WEIE Board..................................................................................................................................................6-10 6.3.1 Panel of the WEIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-10 6.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE Board....................................................................................................................6-11 6.3.3 Ports on the WEIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-12 6.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board.......................................................................................................6-12 6.4 WFEE Board.................................................................................................................................................6-14 6.4.1 Panel of the WFEE Board....................................................................................................................6-15 6.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE Board...................................................................................................................6-15 6.4.3 Ports on the WFEE Board....................................................................................................................6-16 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Contents
6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board......................................................................................................6-17 6.5 WFIE Board..................................................................................................................................................6-18 6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-19 6.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE Board....................................................................................................................6-19 6.5.3 Ports on the WFIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-20 6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board.................................................................................................................6-20 6.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board....................................................................................6-21 6.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board...................................................................................6-22 6.7 WFSM Board................................................................................................................................................6-23 6.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board.........................................................................................................6-23 6.8 WHPU Board................................................................................................................................................6-24 6.8.1 Panel of the WHPU Board...................................................................................................................6-24 6.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU Board..................................................................................................................6-25 6.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board.........................................................................................................6-26 6.9 WLPU Board.................................................................................................................................................6-27 6.9.1 Panels of the WLPU Board..................................................................................................................6-28 6.9.2 LED on the WLPU Board....................................................................................................................6-28 6.9.3 Ports on the WLPU Board....................................................................................................................6-29 6.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board.........................................................................................................6-29 6.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU Boards..............................................................................6-31 6.10 WMPU Board..............................................................................................................................................6-31 6.10.1 Panel of the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................6-32 6.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU Board...............................................................................................................6-33 6.10.3 Ports on the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................6-33 6.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board......................................................................................................6-34 6.11 WMUX/WMUXb Board.............................................................................................................................6-35 6.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb Board................................................................................................6-35 6.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board...............................................................................................6-36 6.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb Board................................................................................................6-37 6.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb Boards..........................................................6-38 6.12 WNET/WNETc Board................................................................................................................................6-38 6.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc Board...................................................................................................6-39 6.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board..................................................................................................6-40 6.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc Board...................................................................................................6-40 6.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board.........................................................................................6-41 6.13 WOSE/WOSEb Board................................................................................................................................6-42 6.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb Board...................................................................................................6-43 6.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board .................................................................................................6-45 6.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb Board...................................................................................................6-46 6.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board......................................................................................6-46 6.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb Boards.............................................................6-48 6.14 WOSEc Board.............................................................................................................................................6-49 Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd iii
Contents
RNC Hardware Description 6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc Board................................................................................................................6-50 6.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc Board...............................................................................................................6-50 6.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc Board................................................................................................................6-51 6.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board..................................................................................................6-51 6.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc Boards..........................................................................6-53
6.15 WSPUb Board.............................................................................................................................................6-53 6.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb Board................................................................................................................6-54 6.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb Board...............................................................................................................6-54 6.16 WDMB Board.............................................................................................................................................6-55 6.16.1 Panel of the WDMB Board................................................................................................................6-55 6.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB Board...............................................................................................................6-56 6.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board......................................................................................................6-57 6.17 WOPB Board...............................................................................................................................................6-57
7 RNC Cables.................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial Cable........................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable..................................................................................................................7-8 7.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-11 7.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-13 7.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-14 7.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-15 7.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-17 7.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-19 7.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable......................................................................................7-22 7.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-23 7.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.......................................................................................7-25 7.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-26 7.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-28 7.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-28 7.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-29 7.16 RNC Crossover Cable.................................................................................................................................7-31 7.17 RNC Straight-Through Cable......................................................................................................................7-32 7.18 RNC Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-33 7.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal Cable....................................................................................................................7-34 7.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXb..........................................................................7-35 7.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETc.............................................................................7-37 7.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power Distribution Box........................................................................7-39 7.23 RNC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................7-40 7.24 RNC PGND Cable......................................................................................................................................7-41
8 LEDs on RNC Boards................................................................................................................8-1

8.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box...................................................................... 8-3 8.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite....................................................................................................8-3 8.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G).......................................................................................8-4 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Contents
8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)............................................................................8-5 8.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.................................................................................................................8-8 8.6 LEDs on the WEIE Board...............................................................................................................................8-9 8.7 LEDs on the WFEE Board............................................................................................................................8-10 8.8 LEDs on the WFIE Board.............................................................................................................................8-10 8.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board............................................................................................8-11 8.10 LEDs on the WHPU Board.........................................................................................................................8-12 8.11 LED on the WLPU Board...........................................................................................................................8-12 8.12 LEDs on the WMPU Board........................................................................................................................8-13 8.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board........................................................................................................8-13 8.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board...........................................................................................................8-14 8.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board ..........................................................................................................8-14 8.16 LEDs on the WOSEc Board........................................................................................................................8-15 8.17 LEDs on the WSPUb Board........................................................................................................................8-16 8.18 LEDs on the WDMB Board........................................................................................................................8-16
9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards..................................................................................................9-1

9.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.....................................................................................................9-3 9.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board..................................................................................................................9-5 9.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board.................................................................................................................9-6 9.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board....................................................................................................................9-8 9.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board....................................................................................................................9-9 9.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board..................................................................................................................9-10 9.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................9-11 9.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board....................................................................................................9-13 9.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board.................................................................................................9-14 9.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board...........................................................................................................9-15 9.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board...............................................................................................................9-17
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 RNC hardware components................................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Minimum configuration......................................................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-3 Maximum configuration.....................................................................................................................1-4 Figure 2-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet..................................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-2 N68-22 WRSR assembly diagram (front view).................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 N68-22-N WRSR assembly diagram (front view).............................................................................2-8 Figure 2-4 Front panel of the power distribution box........................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-5 Back panel of the power distribution box.........................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-6 Switcher............................................................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-7 Front panel of the switcher...............................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-8 Back panel of the switcher................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-9 KVM.................................................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-10 Front panel of the KVM.................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-11 Back panel of the KVM..................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-12 GRU suite.......................................................................................................................................2-17 Figure 2-13 Front panel of the GRU suite..........................................................................................................2-17 Figure 2-14 Back panel of the GRU box............................................................................................................2-19 Figure 2-15 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................2-21 Figure 2-16 Front panel of the S3528G LAN switch.........................................................................................2-22 Figure 2-17 Back panel of the S3528G LAN switch.........................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-18 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................2-25 Figure 2-19 Front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch....................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-20 Back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.....................................................................................2-30 Figure 2-21 Logical structure of OM subsystem................................................................................................2-33 Figure 2-22 BAM server (IBM X3650T)...........................................................................................................2-34 Figure 2-23 Front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T).............................................................................2-34 Figure 2-24 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..............................................................................2-36 Figure 2-25 BAM server (IBM X343-8847)......................................................................................................2-37 Figure 2-26 Front panel of the BAM server.......................................................................................................2-37 Figure 2-27 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).........................................................................2-39 Figure 2-28 Power supply of the WRSR............................................................................................................2-40 Figure 2-29 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X343-8847)...........2-42 Figure 2-30 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X3650T)................2-43 Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd vii
Figures
RNC Hardware Description Figure 2-31 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed).......................2-46
Figure 2-32 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed)............................2-47 Figure 2-33 Connections of WRSR signal cables (Right view).........................................................................2-48 Figure 3-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet..................................................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 N68-22 WRBR assembly diagram (front view).................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 N68-22-N WRBR assembly diagram (front view).............................................................................3-5 Figure 3-4 Power supply of the WRBR...............................................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRBR..........................................................3-8 Figure 3-6 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (1)....................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-7 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (2)....................................................................................3-11 Figure 4-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Fan drawer..........................................................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-3 WRSS in full configuration................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-4 Connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack..................................................4-6 Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 5-2 Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based).............................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Full Configuration (WFIEs shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface).........................................................5-4 Figure 5-4 Full configuration (Iur/Iu interface, IP based, WFIEs in slots 1 and 14 used)...................................5-5 Figure 6-1 WBIE/WBIEb panel...........................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-2 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb....................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-3 WEIE panel.......................................................................................................................................6-11 Figure 6-4 DIP switches on the WEIE...............................................................................................................6-13 Figure 6-5 WFEE panel......................................................................................................................................6-15 Figure 6-6 DIP switches on the WFEE..............................................................................................................6-17 Figure 6-7 WFIE panel.......................................................................................................................................6-19 Figure 6-8 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel......................................................................................................6-22 Figure 6-9 DIP switch on the WFSM.................................................................................................................6-23 Figure 6-10 WHPU panel...................................................................................................................................6-25 Figure 6-11 DIP switch on the WHPU...............................................................................................................6-26 Figure 6-12 WLPU panels..................................................................................................................................6-28 Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the WLPU...............................................................................................................6-30 Figure 6-14 WMPU panel..................................................................................................................................6-32 Figure 6-15 DIP switch on the WMPU..............................................................................................................6-34 Figure 6-16 WMUX/WMUXb panel.................................................................................................................6-36 Figure 6-17 WNET/WNETc panel.....................................................................................................................6-39 Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc............................................................6-41 Figure 6-19 WOSE panel...................................................................................................................................6-44 Figure 6-20 WOSEb panel.................................................................................................................................6-45 Figure 6-21 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb...................................................................................................6-47 Figure 6-22 WOSEc panel.................................................................................................................................6-50 Figure 6-23 DIP switches on the WOSEc..........................................................................................................6-52 Figure 6-24 WSPUb panel.................................................................................................................................6-54 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Figures
Figure 6-25 WDMB panel..................................................................................................................................6-56 Figure 6-26 DIP switch on the WDMB..............................................................................................................6-57 Figure 7-1 75-ohm coaxial cable..........................................................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-2 120-ohm twisted pair cable.................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-3 MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-4 MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-13 Figure 7-5 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-6 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable.........................................................................................7-16 Figure 7-7 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-8 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.........................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-9 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-22 Figure 7-10 SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-24 Figure 7-11 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-12 LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-27 Figure 7-13 LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-28 Figure 7-14 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable....................................................................................7-29 Figure 7-15 SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-30 Figure 7-16 Crossover cable...............................................................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-17 Pins of the crossover cable.............................................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-18 Straight-through cable....................................................................................................................7-32 Figure 7-19 Pins of the straight-through cable...................................................................................................7-33 Figure 7-20 Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc..........................................7-34 Figure 7-21 BITS clock cable............................................................................................................................7-34 Figure 7-22 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-35 Figure 7-23 Installation position of the alarm box signal cable.........................................................................7-35 Figure 7-24 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and WMUX/WMUXb.....................................................7-36 Figure 7-25 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc...................................................7-38 Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box..................................................................7-39 Figure 7-27 RNC -48V/GND power cables.......................................................................................................7-41 Figure 7-28 PGND cable....................................................................................................................................7-42 Figure 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb....................................................................................................9-3 Figure 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE.................................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE................................................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM...................................................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU...................................................................................................................9-9 Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU.................................................................................................................9-10 Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU................................................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-8 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc..............................................................9-13 Figure 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.....................................................................................................9-14 Figure 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc..........................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB..............................................................................................................9-17
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
ix
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 RNC hardware......................................................................................................................................1-2 Table 1-2 Typical configurations......................................................................................................................... 1-4 Table 2-1 Internal configuration of the WRSR....................................................................................................2-6 Table 2-2 Internal configuration of the WRSR....................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-3 LEDs on the power distribution box..................................................................................................2-12 Table 2-4 Technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes.............................................................2-13 Table 2-5 Front panel of the switcher.................................................................................................................2-14 Table 2-6 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite.........................................................................................2-18 Table 2-7 Ports on the front panel of the GRU suite..........................................................................................2-18 Table 2-8 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch........................................................................2-22 Table 2-9 GBIC modules applicable to the RNC...............................................................................................2-24 Table 2-10 Specifications for optical ports on LAN switches (S3528G)...........................................................2-24 Table 2-11 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch..................................................................2-26 Table 2-12 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC...........................................................................2-30 Table 2-13 Specifications for optical ports on the LAN switches (S3928P-EI).................................................2-31 Table 2-14 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..................................................2-34 Table 2-15 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..................................................2-36 Table 2-16 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).............................................2-38 Table 2-17 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).............................................2-39 Table 2-18 Relation between the power control switches and the WRSR components.....................................2-41 Table 2-19 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR..........................................................................2-44 Table 2-20 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed)........................2-49 Table 2-21 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed).............................2-58 Table 2-22 Connection between the WFIE and the LAN switches....................................................................2-68 Table 2-23 Structural specifications of the WRSR............................................................................................2-71 Table 2-24 Electrical specifications of the WRSR.............................................................................................2-72 Table 3-1 WRBR configuration........................................................................................................................... 3-4 Table 3-2 WRBR configuration........................................................................................................................... 3-6 Table 3-3 Relationship between the power control switches and the components.............................................. 3-7 Table 3-4 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR..............................................................................3-9 Table 3-5 Signal cables in the WRBR................................................................................................................3-12 Table 3-6 Structural specifications of the WRBR..............................................................................................3-15 Table 3-7 Electrical specifications of the WRBR...............................................................................................3-15 Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd xi
Tables
RNC Hardware Description Table 4-1 Components of the WRSS................................................................................................................... 4-3 Table 4-2 LED on the fan drawer.........................................................................................................................4-5 Table 4-3 Engineering specifications of the WRSS.............................................................................................4-7 Table 5-1 Components of the WRBS...................................................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Engineering specifications of the WRBS.............................................................................................5-5 Table 6-1 Compatibility between WRBS interface boards..................................................................................6-4 Table 6-2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.......................................................................................................6-6 Table 6-3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel........................................................................................................6-7 Table 6-4 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.....................................................................................................6-8 Table 6-5 LEDs on the WEIE panel...................................................................................................................6-11 Table 6-6 Ports on the WEIE panel....................................................................................................................6-12 Table 6-7 DIP switches on the WEIE.................................................................................................................6-13 Table 6-8 LEDs on the WFEE panel..................................................................................................................6-16 Table 6-9 Ports on the WFEE panel...................................................................................................................6-16 Table 6-10 DIP switches on the WFEE..............................................................................................................6-17 Table 6-11 LEDs on the WFIE panel.................................................................................................................6-20 Table 6-12 Ports on the WFIE panel..................................................................................................................6-20 Table 6-13 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel................................................................................6-22 Table 6-14 DIP switch on the WFSM................................................................................................................6-24 Table 6-15 LEDs on the WHPU panel...............................................................................................................6-25 Table 6-16 DIP switch on the WHPU................................................................................................................6-27 Table 6-17 LED on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................6-29 Table 6-18 Ports on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................6-29 Table 6-19 DIP switch on the WLPU.................................................................................................................6-30 Table 6-20 Specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards............................................................................6-31 Table 6-21 LEDs on the WMPU panel..............................................................................................................6-33 Table 6-22 Ports on the WMPU panel................................................................................................................6-33 Table 6-23 DIP switch on the WMPU................................................................................................................6-34 Table 6-24 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel..............................................................................................6-37 Table 6-25 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel...............................................................................................6-37 Table 6-26 Specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards..........................................................6-38 Table 6-27 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.................................................................................................6-40 Table 6-28 Ports on the WNET/WNETc panel..................................................................................................6-40 Table 6-29 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc..................................................................6-42 Table 6-30 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel.......................................................................................................6-45 Table 6-31 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb panel..................................................................................................6-46 Table 6-32 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.....................................................................................................6-47 Table 6-33 Specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards............................................................................6-48 Table 6-34 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards..........................................................................6-49 Table 6-35 LEDs on the WOSEc panel..............................................................................................................6-51 Table 6-36 Ports on the WOSEc panel...............................................................................................................6-51 Table 6-37 DIP switches on the WOSEc............................................................................................................6-52
xii
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Tables
Table 6-38 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards..........................................................................6-53 Table 6-39 LEDs on the WSPUb panel..............................................................................................................6-54 Table 6-40 LEDs on the WDMB panel..............................................................................................................6-56 Table 6-41 DIP switch on the WDMB...............................................................................................................6-57 Table 7-1 Relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50 connectors........................................7-7 Table 7-2 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.............................................................................7-8 Table 7-3 Relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors.......................................7-10 Table 7-4 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable..............................................................................7-11 Table 7-5 Pins of the crossover cable.................................................................................................................7-31 Table 7-6 Pins of the straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-33 Table 7-7 Pins of the alarm box signal cable......................................................................................................7-35 Table 7-8 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (1)...................7-36 Table 7-9 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (2)...................7-37 Table 7-10 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc..........................7-38 Table 7-11 Signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box..........................................7-39 Table 7-12 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-39 Table 7-13 Power cables connecting the RNC cabinet......................................................................................7-40 Table 7-14 PGND cables connecting the RNC cabinet......................................................................................7-41 Table 8-1 LEDs on the power distribution box....................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-2 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite...........................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch..........................................................................8-4 Table 8-4 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch......................................................................8-5 Table 8-5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.......................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-6 LEDs on the WEIE panel.....................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-7 LEDs on the WFEE panel..................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-8 LEDs on the WFIE panel...................................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel..................................................................................8-11 Table 8-10 LEDs on the WHPU panel...............................................................................................................8-12 Table 8-11 LED on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................8-12 Table 8-12 LEDs on the WMPU panel..............................................................................................................8-13 Table 8-13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel..............................................................................................8-13 Table 8-14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.................................................................................................8-14 Table 8-15 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel.......................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-16 LEDs on the WOSEc panel..............................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-17 LEDs on the WSPUb panel..............................................................................................................8-16 Table 8-18 LEDs on the WDMB panel..............................................................................................................8-16 Table 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.....................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE...................................................................................................................9-6 Table 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE..................................................................................................................9-7 Table 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM....................................................................................................................9-8 Table 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU....................................................................................................................9-9 Table 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU...................................................................................................................9-11 Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd xiii
Tables
RNC Hardware Description Table 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU..................................................................................................................9-12 Table 9-8 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc.................................................................... 9-13 Table 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.......................................................................................................9-15 Table 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc............................................................................................................9-16 Table 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB...............................................................................................................9-17
xiv
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the hardware components of the RNC. It provides the users with a detailed and comprehensive reference to Huawei RNC.
Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name RNC Model BSC6800 Version V100R010
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l l
RNC installers RNC site operators
Change History
Refer to Changes in RNC Hardware Description.
Organization
1 Hardware Overview This describes the RNC hardware in terms of the hardware components and the hardware configuration. 2 WRSR Cabinet This describes the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR performs the switching function of the RNC. Each RNC is configured with one WRSR. 3 WRBR Cabinet This describes the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR performs the service processing function of the RNC. It is optional. The RNC can be configured with zero to five WRBRs as required.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 1
About This Document
4 WRSS Subrack This describes the WRSS subrack. The WRSS is configured in the WRSR. The RNC must be configured with one and only one WRSS. The WRSS exchanges data, processes PS services, and provides timing signals for the system. 5 WRBS Subrack This describes the WRBS subrack. The WRBS subrack is installed in the WRSR and the WRBR. It is optional. The RNC should be configured with at least one WRBS. The quantity of WRBSs configured for the RNC varies from 1 to 16 according to the system capacity required for the engineering. The main functions of the WRBS are performing protocol processing on the control plane, performing AAL2 switching and termination of the service data on the user plane, and performing related protocol processing on the user plane. The WRBS provides E1/T1 transmission ports and channelized STM-1 ATM transmission ports for the Iu, Iu-BC, Iur, and Iub interfaces. It also provides E1/T1 IP transmission ports and FE IP transmission ports for the Iu, Iur interface. 6 RNC Boards This describes the RNC boards. The RNC boards include the following: WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/ WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, WFEE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, WSPUb, WFSM, WOPB, WDMB, WLPU, WMPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc. 7 RNC Cables This part describes all the cables used inside and outside the RNC cabinet. 8 LEDs on RNC Boards This describes the LEDs on the RNC boards and on the front panels of the power distribution box, GRU suite, and LAN switch. The RNC boards include the following types: the WBIE/ WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFIE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WMUX/ WMUXb, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, WSPUb, and WDMB. 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards This describes the DIP switches on the following RNC boards: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFSM, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, and WDMB.
Conventions
1. Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
DANGER
WARNING
2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
2. General Conventions Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New 3. Command Conventions Convention Boldface Italic [] {x | y | ...} [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... } * [ x | y | ... ] * Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italic. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.One is selected. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars.One or none is selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected. Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. For example,log in as user root . Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
4. GUI Conventions
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
About This Document
Convention Boldface >
Description Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are in boldface. For example,click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example,choose File > Create > Folder .
5. Keyboard Operation Convention Key Key1+Key2 Key1,Key2 Description Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
6. Mouse Operation Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1 Hardware Overview
1
About This Chapter
Hardware Overview
This describes the RNC hardware in terms of the hardware components and the hardware configuration. 1.1 RNC Hardware Components This describes the RNC hardware components. The RNC hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, LMT, and alarm box. 1.2 RNC Hardware Configuration This describes the RNC hardware configuration. The RNC hardware configurations refer to the minimum configuration, the maximum configuration, the typical configurations and the capacity expansion configuration.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1-1
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 RNC Hardware Components

This describes the RNC hardware components. The RNC hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, LMT, and alarm box. Figure 1-1 shows the RNC hardware components. Figure 1-1 RNC hardware components
(1) GPS: Global Positioning System
(2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (3) LMT: Local Maintenance (DC) Terminal
NOTE
The hub as shown in Figure 1-1 is prepared by the customer. It is used when more than one LMT is configured.
Table 1-1 describes the components of the RNC. Table 1-1 RNC hardware Component WRSR cabinet WRBR cabinet RNC cables
1-2
Description Refer to 2 WRSR Cabinet. Refer to 3 WRBR Cabinet. Refer to 7 RNC Cables.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1 Hardware Overview
Component RNC GPS antenna system
Description The system is composed of the antenna, feeder, jumper, and lightning arrester. The RNC GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It is optional.
RNC LMT
The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal software and is connected with the OM network of Network Elements (NEs). The LMT is used to operate and maintain Network NEs. For details, refer to the A RNC LMT User Guide. The RNC LMT is optional. The number of LMTs to be configured is determined according to the requirements.
RNC alarm box
Refer to RNC Alarm Box.
1.2 RNC Hardware Configuration

This describes the RNC hardware configuration. The RNC hardware configurations refer to the minimum configuration, the maximum configuration, the typical configurations and the capacity expansion configuration.
Minimum Configuration
The RNC supports the configuration of a single cabinet, that is, one RNC requires only one WRSR cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2 Minimum configuration
The performance specifications for the RNC minimum configuration are as follows:
l l
A maximum of 2,500 Erlang traffic volume 62.5 thousand subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is 0.04 Erlang
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 1-3
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1 Hardware Overview
l l
60 Mbit/s data throughput 100 NodeBs and 300 cells
Maximum Configuration
As shown in Figure 1-3, the maximum configuration for an RNC consists of six cabinets (one WRSR cabinet and five WRBR cabinets) and 17 subracks (one WRSS subrack and 16 WRBS subracks). Figure 1-3 Maximum configuration
Below lists the performance specifications for the RNC maximum configuration:
l l
A maximum of 40,000 traffic volume Erlang 1 million subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is 0.04 Erlang 960 Mbit/s data throughput 1600 NodeBs and 4800 cells
l l
Typical Configurations
The performance specifications for the RNC typical configurations are listed in Table 1-2. You can determine the configurations based on actual requirements. Table 1-2 Typical configurations Configuratio n WRSS+BAM +1 WRBS WRSS+BAM +4 WRBSs WRSS+BAM +7 WRBSs
1-4
Number of Cabinets 1 2 3
Traffic Volume (Erlang) 2,500 10,000 17,500
Number of Subscriber s 62.5 thousand 250 thousand 437.5 thousand
Number of NodeBs 100 400 700
Number of Cells 300 1,200 2,100
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1 Hardware Overview
Configuratio n WRSS+BAM +10 WRBSs WRSS+BAM +13 WRBSs WRSS+BAM +16 WRBSs
Number of Cabinets 4 5 6
Traffic Volume (Erlang) 25,000 32,500 40,000
Number of Subscriber s 625 thousand 812.5 thousand 1 million
Number of NodeBs 1,000 1,300 1,600
Number of Cells 3,000 3,900 4,800
Capacity Expansion Configuration

The RNC system features a modular design and can smoothly realize the capacity expansion based on the WRSS+BAM+1WRBS solution and by adding WRBS subracks. The process of capacity expansion does not interrupt the services. The smoothly capacity expansion is achieved after the addition of the WRBS subracks. The performance specifications for the RNC = performance specifications of a single WRBS subrack x number of subracks. The performance specifications of a single WRBS subrack are as follows:
l l
A maximum of 2,500 Erlang traffic volume 62.5 thousand subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is 0.04 Erlang 60 Mbit/s data throughput 100 NodeBs and 300 cells
l l
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
1-5
2 WRSR Cabinet
2
About This Chapter
WRSR Cabinet
This describes the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR performs the switching function of the RNC. Each RNC is configured with one WRSR. 2.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets This describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance. 2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet This describes the components of the WRSR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the same while the internal configurations are slightly different. 2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box This describes the RNC power distribution box. Each RNC cabinet must be configured with one power distribution box. The power distribution box is installed at the top of the cabinet. 2.4 Switcher This describes the switcher. When two BAM servers are configured in the system, they share the same KVM. In this case, a switcher is required to control their use of the KVM. The WRSR must be configured with one switcher. The switcher is installed above the KVM. 2.5 KVM This describes the KVM. The KVM is an integrated device, including mouse, keyboard and monitor. It is an operation platform shared by the two BAM servers. The WRSR must be configured with one KVM. The KVM is installed between the WRBS and the switcher. 2.6 GRU Suite This describes the GRU suite. The GRU suite receives and processes positioning information and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then exports the timing signals as a system clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate system RFNs and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The GRU suite is optional for the RNC. The RNC can be configured with one or two GRU suites when the system provides the positioning function. When two GRU suites are installed, they work in active/standby mode and support 1+1 backup. The GRU suite is installed in the GRU box which is located between the WRBS and the optical cable tray.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 2-1
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.7 Optical Cable Tray This describes the optical cable tray. The optical cable tray supports the optical cables that are from the front of the subracks to the back of the cabinet. 2.8 Cable Tray This describes the cable tray. The WRSR shall be configured with one or two LAN switch cable trays based on the site requirements. One cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1, and the other cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3. The cable trays provide space for Ethernet cables of the two neighboring LAN switches. 2.9 LAN Switch This describes the LAN switch. The LAN switch provides 10M/100M Ethernet ports, GE ports and VLAN functions for the RNC. The WRSR should be configured with two, that is LAN switch-0 and LAN switch-1, or at most four LAN switches according to the site requirements. The RNC LAN switches refer to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). 2.10 BAM Server This describes the BAM server. The RNC BAM server can use either the IBM X343-8847 or the IBM X3650T. The RNC is configured with one BAM server (single-server system) or two BAM servers (dual-server system) according to the site requirements. The BAM servers are installed at the bottom of the WRSR. 2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR Cabinet This describes the cable connections in the WRSR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRSR cabinet refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable. 2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR Cabinet This describes the engineering specifications for the WRSR cabinet. The engineering specifications for the N68-22 WRSR and N68-22-N WRSR include structural specifications and electrical specifications.
2-2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets

This describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance. The appearance of the RNC cabinet is shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet
2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet

This describes the components of the WRSR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the same while the internal configurations are slightly different. 2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22) This describes the components of the N68-22 WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server. 2.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N) This describes the components of the N68-22-N WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-3
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22)

This describes the components of the N68-22 WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.
Configuration
Figure 2-2 shows the N68-22 WRSR configuration.
2-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-2 N68-22 WRSR assembly diagram (front view)
(1) BAM_Lower (4) LAN Switch-0 (7) Optical cable tray (10) KVM
(2) Filler panel (5) LAN switch cable tray (8) GRU suite (optional) (11) Switcher
(3) BAM_Upper (6) LAN Switch-1 (9) WRBS (12) LAN Switch-2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-5
2 WRSR Cabinet
(13) LAN Switch-3 (14) WRSS

(15) Power distribution box
NOTE
The N68-22 WRSR is 46 U high inside. There is a 1 U filler panel between the switcher and the LAN Switch-2 in the N68-22 WRSR.
Configuration Description
Table 2-1 Internal configuration of the WRSR Component Power distribution box WRSS subrack Switcher KVM WRBS subrack Configuration Refer to Section RNC Power Distribution Box WRSS Subrack Switcher KVM WRBS Subrack Remarks
1, mandatory
None
1, mandatory 1, mandatory 1, mandatory 1, mandatory
None Purchased device Purchased device None 1 or 2 GRU suites are configured when the system provides the positioning function. None
GRU suite
Optional
GRU Suite
Optical cable tray
1, mandatory 1 or 2 The number of LAN switch cable trays is determined as required. When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for the LAN Switch-2 and the LAN Switch-3 is covered by a filler panel.
Optical Cable Tray
Cable tray
Cable Tray
None
2-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Component
Configuration 1 or 2. The number of LAN switch cable trays is determined as required When RNC is fully configured the number of LAN switch is 4. When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3 is covered by the filler panel. 1 for single-server BAM system; 2 for dual-server BAM system
Refer to Section
Remarks Select two or four LAN switches according to the actual requirements such as the required number of FE ports and whether the LAN switches for operation and maintenance and those for services should be separated.
LAN switch
LAN Switch
BAM server
BAM Server
Purchased device
2.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N)

This describes the components of the N68-22-N WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.
Configuration
Figure 2-3 shows the N68-22-N WRSR configuration.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-7
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-3 N68-22-N WRSR assembly diagram (front view)
(1) BAM_Lower (4) LAN Switch-0 (7) Optical cable tray (10) KVM
(2) Filler panel (5) LAN switch cable tray (8) GRU suite (optional) (11) Switcher
(3) BAM_Upper (6) LAN Switch-1 (9) WRBS (12) LAN Switch-2
2-8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

(13) LAN Switch-3 (14) WRSS
2 WRSR Cabinet
NOTE
The N68-22-N WRSR is 45 U high inside. There is no filler panel between the switcher and the LAN Switch-2 in the N68-22-N WRSR.
Configuration Description
Table 2-2 Internal configuration of the WRSR Component Power distribution box WRSS subrack Switcher KVM WRBS subrack Configuration Refer to Section RNC Power Distribution Box WRSS Subrack Switcher KVM WRBS Subrack Remarks
1, mandatory 1, mandatory 1, mandatory 1, mandatory 1, mandatory
None None Purchased device Purchased device None One or two GRU suites are configured when the system provides the positioning function None
GRU suite
Optional
GRU Suite
Optical cable tray
1, mandatory 1 or 2. The number of LAN switch cable trays is determined as required. When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for the LAN Switch-2 and the LAN Switch-3 is covered by a filler panel.
Optical Cable Tray
Cable tray
Cable Tray
None
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-9
2 WRSR Cabinet
Component
Configuration
Refer to Section
Remarks In a whole RNC system, select two or four LAN switches according to the actual requirements such as the required number of FE ports and whether the LAN switches for operation and maintenance and those for services should be separated. Purchased device
LAN switch
1 or 2. The number of LAN switch cable trays is determined as required When RNC is fully configured the number of LAN switch is 4. When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3 is covered by the filler panel.
LAN Switch
BAM server
1 for single-server BAM system; 2 for dual-server BAM system
BAM Server
2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box

This describes the RNC power distribution box. Each RNC cabinet must be configured with one power distribution box. The power distribution box is installed at the top of the cabinet. The power distribution box provides lightning protection and overcurrent protection for the two inputs of 48 V power to the cabinet. Then, it outputs six channels of 48 V power to functional modules in the cabinet. It also detects the input voltage and the output power status, and sends out alarms when faults occur. 2.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box This describes the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box are the WDMB panel, alarm sound switch, labels of power distribution switches, power distribution switches, and WOPB panel. 2.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box This describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. 2.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box This describes the back panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the back panel of the RNC power distribution box refer to the power input terminal block, the power output terminal block, the port for the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, and the communication serial port. 2.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution Boxes The technical specifications for power distribution boxes of the RNC consist of input specifications and output specifications.
2-10
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box

This describes the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box are the WDMB panel, alarm sound switch, labels of power distribution switches, power distribution switches, and WOPB panel. Figure 2-4 shows the front panel of the power distribution box. Figure 2-4 Front panel of the power distribution box
CAUTION
l
Before operating a power distribution switch, see the distribution label on the panel of the power distribution box. Before disassembling a device whose power is controlled by a switch, you need to switch off this device and then remove the power cables. For details of the WDMB and WOPB, refer to 6.16 WDMB Board and 6.17 WOPB Board.
You can use the alarm sound switch to set the power distribution box to emit sound or not:
l l
If you set the switch to ON, the power distribution box emits sound when it is faulty. If you set the switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not emit sound when it is faulty.
2.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box
This describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. Table 2-3 describes the LEDs.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-11
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-3 LEDs on the power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s OFF Meaning The WDMB works properly and communicates with the WMUXb properly. The WDMB is not working or it does not communicate with the WMUXb properly. The power supply for the WDMB is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm concerning the power distribution box. The power distribution box is faulty. However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALM LED is always ON. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
ALM
Red
OFF ON
2.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box

This describes the back panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the back panel of the RNC power distribution box refer to the power input terminal block, the power output terminal block, the port for the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, and the communication serial port. Figure 2-5 shows the back panel of the power distribution box. Figure 2-5 Back panel of the power distribution box
(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port for monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box
2-12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-5 shows only the main ports related to the RNC. On the power input terminal block and the power output terminal block, the connecting positions of the 48 V power cables are labeled 48 V and the connecting positions of the GND power cables are labeled RTN. The monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box is connected to the MONITOR port on the lowest WRBS subrack in the RNC cabinet. In this way, the communication between the power distribution board and the board on the server is realized.
2.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution Boxes

The technical specifications for power distribution boxes of the RNC consist of input specifications and output specifications. Table 2-4 describes the technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes. Table 2-4 Technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes Item Input Rated input voltage Input voltage range Input mode Maximum input current Output Rated output voltage Output voltage range Rated output power Output mode and current Specification 48 V 40 V to 57 V Two 48 V inputs in 1+1 hot backup mode 100 A for each input 48 V 40 V to 57 V 4,800 W (48 V input) The RNC provides six groups of independent 48 V outputs. These groups correspond to switches SW1SW6. For SW1SW3, the rated current for each output is 30 A; for SW4SW6, it is 70 A. The RNC provides overcurrent protection. For SW1SW3, the overcurrent protection triggering point is 37.5 A for each output; for SW4SW6, it is 87.5 A for each output. After the overcurrent protection, the associated switch needs to be manually set back to the working mode.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-13
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.4 Switcher
This describes the switcher. When two BAM servers are configured in the system, they share the same KVM. In this case, a switcher is required to control their use of the KVM. The WRSR must be configured with one switcher. The switcher is installed above the KVM.
Appearance
Figure 2-6 shows the appearance of the switcher. Figure 2-6 Switcher
Front Panel
Figure 2-7 shows the front panel of the switcher. Figure 2-7 Front panel of the switcher
Table 2-5 describes the front panel of the switcher. Table 2-5 Front panel of the switcher No. (1) (2) (3) (4)
2-14
Description SKIP, used to enable/disable the AutoSkip function. The RNC does not use it. SCAN, used to enable/disable the AutoScan function and set the scanning rate. The RNC does not use it. Channel LEDs. When the switcher is in normal communication with a computer on a channel, the corresponding LED is red. AutoSkip LED. When the AutoSkip function is enabled, the LED is green.
2 WRSR Cabinet
No. (5) (6)
Description AutoScan LED. When the AutoScan function is enabled, the LED is green. Channel selection. Channel buttons 1 to 8 correspond to channels 1 to 8 which are labeled on the back panel of the switcher.
Back Panel
Figure 2-8 shows the back panel of the switcher. Figure 2-8 Back panel of the switcher
(1) Power switch
(2) Mouse port
(3) Serial port for switcher function setting
(4) Cable sockets for BAM servers (5) DC input power socket (6) Keyboard port (7) Monitor port
2.5 KVM
This describes the KVM. The KVM is an integrated device, including mouse, keyboard and monitor. It is an operation platform shared by the two BAM servers. The WRSR must be configured with one KVM. The KVM is installed between the WRBS and the switcher.
Appearance
Figure 2-9 shows the appearance of the KVM.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-15
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-9 KVM
Front Panel
Figure 2-10 shows the front panel of the KVM. Figure 2-10 Front panel of the KVM
Back Panel
Figure 2-11 shows the back panel of the KVM. Figure 2-11 Back panel of the KVM
2.6 GRU Suite

This describes the GRU suite. The GRU suite receives and processes positioning information and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then exports the timing signals as a system clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate system RFNs and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The GRU suite is optional for the RNC. The RNC can be configured with one or two GRU suites when the system provides the positioning function. When two GRU suites are installed, they work in active/standby mode
2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
and support 1+1 backup. The GRU suite is installed in the GRU box which is located between the WRBS and the optical cable tray. Figure 2-12 shows the GRU suite. Figure 2-12 GRU suite
2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU Suite This describes the front panel of the GRU suite. There are the following components on the front panel of the GRU suite: LEDs, RST button, and output ports. 2.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite This describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite. 2.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite This describes ports on the front panel of the GRU suite. The ports refer to PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2. 2.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU Suite This describes the back panel of the GRU suite. The components on the back panel refer to the power input socket and the GPS signal input port.
2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU Suite

This describes the front panel of the GRU suite. There are the following components on the front panel of the GRU suite: LEDs, RST button, and output ports. Figure 2-13 shows the front panel of the GRU suite. Figure 2-13 Front panel of the GRU suite
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-17
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite

This describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite. Table 2-6 describes the LEDs. Table 2-6 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite LED Color Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s RUN Green ON OFF OFF ON ON ACT Green OFF Meaning The GRU suite works properly. The power supply is normal but the GRU suite is faulty. The power supply is abnormal or the GRU suite is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The GRU suite obtains correct positioning information. The GRU suite cannot obtain correct positioning information.
ALM
Red
2.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite

This describes ports on the front panel of the GRU suite. The ports refer to PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 2-7 describes the ports. Table 2-7 Ports on the front panel of the GRU suite Name PPS1 Function It outputs PPS signals and 8 kHz heartbeat signals to the WMUX/WMUXb. The 8 kHz heartbeat signals indicate whether the GPS receiver is available. It outputs PPS signals and 8 kHz heartbeat signals to the WMUX/WMUXb. The 8 kHz heartbeat signals indicate whether the GPS receiver is available. It is standby and is used when the system is configured with only one GRU suite. It is used to exchange management and maintenance information with the WMUX/WMUXb. Type RJ45
PPS2
RJ45
COM1
RJ45
2-18
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name COM2
Function It is used to exchange management and maintenance information with the WMUX/WMUXb. It is standby and is used when the system is configured with only one GRU suite. It outputs PPS signals and work status of the clock board in the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc. It outputs PPS signals and work status of the clock board in the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc. It is standby and is used when the system is configured with only one GRU suite.
Type RJ45
CLK1 CLK2
RJ45 RJ45
2.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU Suite

This describes the back panel of the GRU suite. The components on the back panel refer to the power input socket and the GPS signal input port. The GRU suite is in the GRU box. Figure 2-14 shows the back panel of the GRU box. Figure 2-14 Back panel of the GRU box
POWER: power input socket
ANT: GPS signal input port
2.7 Optical Cable Tray

This describes the optical cable tray. The optical cable tray supports the optical cables that are from the front of the subracks to the back of the cabinet.
2.8 Cable Tray

This describes the cable tray. The WRSR shall be configured with one or two LAN switch cable trays based on the site requirements. One cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1, and the other cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3. The cable trays provide space for Ethernet cables of the two neighboring LAN switches. When only the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for the LAN Switch-2 and the LAN Switch-3 is covered by a filler panel.
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.9 LAN Switch

This describes the LAN switch. The LAN switch provides 10M/100M Ethernet ports, GE ports and VLAN functions for the RNC. The WRSR should be configured with two, that is LAN switch-0 and LAN switch-1, or at most four LAN switches according to the site requirements. The RNC LAN switches refer to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LAN switch (S3928P-EI).
NOTE
Before delivery, the LAN switch-0 and LAN switch-1 provide ten pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for operation and maintenance and fourteen pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for services. The LAN switch-2 and LAN switch-3 provide one pair of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for operation and maintenance and twenty-three pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for services. Select two or four LAN switches according to the actual requirements such as the required number of FE ports and whether the LAN switches for operation and maintenance and those for services should be separated. The LAN switches are labeled LAN Switch-0, LAN Switch-1, LAN Switch-2, and LAN Switch-3 before delivery. For details of the LAN switch, refer to its delivery-attached documents and the RNC LAN Switch User Guide. When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the subracks for LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3 are covered by filler panels.
l l l
Differences Between LAN Switch (S3528G) and LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

LAN Switch (S3528G) and LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) are different in aspects such as appearance and GE modules.
l
The two types of LAN switches differ greatly in appearance. They differ in GE ports, buttons, indicators, AC, and DC power sockets. This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicable to the RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. For detailed specifications, refer to 2.9.1.5 GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G). LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) can select any of the three SFP-GE modules: SFP-GE-LXSM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T-A. For detailed specifications, refer to 2.9.2.5 1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI).
2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes the S3528G LAN switch. The S3528G LAN switch can be configured in the WRSR cabinet. 2.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the S3928P-EI LAN switch. The S3928P-EI LAN switch can be configured in the WRSR cabinet.
2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes the S3528G LAN switch. The S3528G LAN switch can be configured in the WRSR cabinet. 2.9.1.1 Appearance of LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes the appearance of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panel of the LAN switch refer to the mode switch button, the Console port, and LEDs. The components on the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt.
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.9.1.2 Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports (RJ45 connectors), four Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC), and one Console port. 2.9.1.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports. 2.9.1.4 Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt. 2.9.1.5 GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicable to the RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. You can choose different kinds of GBIC modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility. 2.9.1.6 Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3528G) The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3528G cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
Appearance of LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes the appearance of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panel of the LAN switch refer to the mode switch button, the Console port, and LEDs. The components on the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt. Figure 2-15 shows the appearance of the LAN switch. Figure 2-15 LAN switch
Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports (RJ45 connectors), four Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC), and one Console port. Figure 2-16 shows the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-21
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-16 Front panel of the S3528G LAN switch
(1) Mode switch button (3) Console port (5) Ethernet port state mode LED (D/S) (7) GBIC module ports and their LEDs
(2) Power LED (PWR) (4) Ethernet port state mode LED (A/L) (6) 10M/100M Ethernet ports and their LEDs
Different kinds of GigaBit Interface Converter (GBIC) modules can be inserted in the GBIC module ports to provide different GE ports, such as 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-TX. The Console port is used for the configuration of the S3528G LAN switch. For details, refer to the RNC Commissioning Guide. The mode switch button is used to control the LEDs of the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display different kinds of states.
LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports. Table 2-8 describes the LEDs. Table 2-8 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch Name Label Col or Gree n Gree n Status ON OFF ON or OFF Meaning The LAN switch is powered on. The LAN switch is powered off. At any time, when either the A/L or the D/S LED is ON, the other LED must be OFF. If the A/L LED is ON and the D/S LED is OFF, you can infer that the 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports are in the ACTIVE/LINK mode. If the A/L LED is OFF and the D/S LED is ON, it is an indication that the 10M/100M Ethernet ports are in the DUPLEX/SPEED mode. There is traffic over the port. There is no traffic over the port.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Power LED
PWR
A/L Ethernet port state mode LED
D/S
Gree n
ON or OFF
LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports (when A/L

2-22
None
Yell ow
ON OFF
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name LED is on, D/S LED is off, and ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode) LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports (when A/L LED is off, D/S LED is on, and ports are in DUPLEX/SPEED mode)
Label
Col or
Status ON
Meaning The port is in the LINK OK state (normal connection). The port is in LINK FAULT status (no connection) or in LINK ERROR status (connection error). The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode. The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode. The port provides the rate of 100 Mbit/ s. The port provides the rate of 10 Mbit/s. There is traffic over the port. There is no traffic over the port. A GBIC module is inserted in the port. No GBIC module is inserted in the port.
None
Gree n
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
None
Yell ow
None
Gree n
ACT LED of GBIC module port LINK
Yell ow Gree n
NOTE
After the S3528G LAN switch is powered on and initialized, the Ethernet port state mode LED A/L is on and the LED D/S is off. You can infer that the 10 M/100 M Ethernet ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode.
Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt. Figure 2-17 shows the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch. Figure 2-17 Back panel of the S3528G LAN switch
(1) DC power socket
(2) Grounding bolt
GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicable to the RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. You can choose different kinds of GBIC modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility.
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-9 describes the GBIC modules that are applicable to the RNC. Table 2-9 GBIC modules applicable to the RNC Name GBIC-SX-MM850A GBIC-LX-SM1310A GBIC-T-A Port Type Cable Type 50 m/125 m multimode optical cable Single-mode optical cable Twisted pair cable Maximum Transmission Distance 550 m 10 Km
SC (optical port)
RJ45 (electrical port)
100 m
Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3528G)

The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3528G cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. The LAN switch S3528G supports the following types of Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) module:
l l l
GBIC-SX-MM850-A GBIC-LX-SM1310-A GBIC-T-A
GBIC-SX-MM850-A and GBIC-LX-SM1310-A provide GE optical ports, and GBIC-T-A provides GE electrical ports. Table 2-10 describes the specifications for optical ports on the GBIC modules. Table 2-10 Specifications for optical ports on LAN switches (S3528G) Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength GBIC-SX-MM850-A Multi-mode SC/PC < 550 m 9.5 dBm to 3.0 dBm 17.0 dBm 3.0 dBm 850 nm GBIC-LX-SM1310-A Single-mode SC/PC < 10 km 9.5 dBm to 3.0 dBm 19.0 dBm 3.0 dBm 1,310 nm
2-24
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the S3928P-EI LAN switch. The S3928P-EI LAN switch can be configured in the WRSR cabinet. 2.9.2.1 Appearance of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the appearance of the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). The front panel of LAN switch S3928P-E1 provides multiple ports, LEDs, and a button, while the back panel provides the AC and DC power sockets and a grounding bolt. 2.9.2.2 Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the front panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The LAN switch provides twentyfour 10M/100M Ethernet ports, that is RJ45 connectors, four 1000Base-X SFP ports, one console port, one mode switch button, one digital display indicator, and other status indicators on the front panel. 2.9.2.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the power LED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports. 2.9.2.4 Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the back panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The AC power socket, the DC power socket, and the PGND grounding bolt are located on the back panel of the LAN switch. 2.9.2.5 1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI) This describes the 1000Base-X SFP port (S3928P-EI). The 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC are SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T. You can choose different kinds of 1000Base-X SFP modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility. 2.9.2.6 Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3928P-EI) The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3928P-EI cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
Appearance of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the appearance of the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). The front panel of LAN switch S3928P-E1 provides multiple ports, LEDs, and a button, while the back panel provides the AC and DC power sockets and a grounding bolt. Figure 2-18 shows the appearance of the LAN switch. Figure 2-18 LAN switch
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-25
2 WRSR Cabinet
Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the front panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The LAN switch provides twentyfour 10M/100M Ethernet ports, that is RJ45 connectors, four 1000Base-X SFP ports, one console port, one mode switch button, one digital display indicator, and other status indicators on the front panel. Figure 2-19 shows the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch. Figure 2-19 Front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch
(1) 10M/100M Ethernet ports and their LEDs (3) DC Power LED (PWR) (5) Mode status LED (7) Digital display LED (9) 1000Base-X SFP port
(2) 1000Base-X SFP ports and their LEDs (4) Power LED (PWR) (6) Mode switch button (8) Console port (10) 10M/100M Ethernet port
Different kinds of SFP modules can be inserted in the SFP module ports to provide different GE ports, such as 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-TX. You can perform local or remote configuration for the LAN switch through the console port. For details, refer to the RNC Commissioning Guide. The mode switch button is used to control the information status of LEDs at the LAN switch ports of different kinds.
LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the power LED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports. Table 2-11 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch. Table 2-11 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch Name Label Status Green; ON Power LED PWR Green; Flash at 1 Hz Meaning The LAN switch is operational. After the system is powered on, it is in self-test state or is downloading software.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-26
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name
Label
Status Red; ON
Meaning After the system is powered on, the self-test fails and the system is faulty. After the system is powered on, some ports fail to perform the self-test. The LAN switch is powered off. The DC power supply and the internal AC power are operational. The AC power supply is faulty or is disconnected, and the internal DC power is operational. The DC power supply is not connected. The PWR LED is green and flashing. The PWR LED is yellow and flashing. The PWR LED is red and on. The PWR LED is green and flashing. The PWR LED is red and on. Do not press the button. The self-test items from one to nine are displayed.
Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz
OFF
Green; ON DC Power LED (PWR)
RPS
Yellow; ON
OFF During the selftest If the selftest fails, Digital display LED Unit Softwa re loadin g Fan failure
The failed self-test items are displayed.
During the software loading, a stub is rotating clockwise.
The letter F is displayed. The unit ID of the Fabric port is displayed. If the system is operational alone, the number 1 is displayed. Rate mode. The rate of the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port, 1000 Mbit/s SFP port, or Fabric port that uses 1000 Mbit/s SFP
Unit id
Mode status LED
Mode
Green; ON
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-27
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name
Label
Status Yellow; ON
Meaning Duplex mode. The duplex information about the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port, 1000 Mbit/s SFP port, or Fabric port that uses 1000 Mbit/s SFP The rate of the port is 100 Mbit/s. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The rate of the port is 10 Mbit/ s. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port works in full-duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port works in half duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is neither receiving nor transmitting data. The rate of the port is 1000 Mbit/s. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected.
Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; ON Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF None Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; ON Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz
Rate mode
10Base-T/ 100BaseTX port LED
Duple x mode
OFF
Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF
1000BaseX SFP port LED
None
Rate mode
2-28
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name
Label
Status Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF Green; Flash at 3 Hz OFF
Meaning The 10M/100M port works in full-duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 1000Base-X SFP port is receiving or transmitting data. The equipment is in IRF ring mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 1000Base-X SFP port is receiving or transmitting data. The equipment is in IRF link mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The Fabric port is faulty. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 1000Base-X SFP port works in full-duplex Fabric mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test.
2-29
Duple x mode
PoE mode
Green; ON
Green; Flash at 1 Hz
Rate mode LED of the 1000BaseX SFP port when the 1000BaseX SFP port is set to Fabric mode
Yellow; ON
Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz Green; Flash at 3 Hz None Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF
Green; ON
Duple x mode
Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF
PoE mode
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Name
Label
Status OFF
Meaning The 10M/100M port is neither receiving nor transmitting data.
Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the back panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The AC power socket, the DC power socket, and the PGND grounding bolt are located on the back panel of the LAN switch. Figure 2-20 shows the back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch. Figure 2-20 Back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch
(1) AC power socket
(2) DC power socket
(3) Grounding bolt
1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI)

This describes the 1000Base-X SFP port (S3928P-EI). The 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC are SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T. You can choose different kinds of 1000Base-X SFP modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility. Table 2-12 describes the 1000Base-X SFP modules that are applicable to the RNC. Table 2-12 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC Name SFP-GE-LX-SM1310A SFP-GE-SX-MM850A SFP-GE-T Port Type LC (optical port) LC (optical port) RJ45 (electrical port) Cable Type Maximum Transmission Distance
Single-mode optical cable 10 Km Multi-mode optical cable 550 m
Twisted pair cable
100 m
2-30
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3928P-EI)

The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3928P-EI cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. The LAN switch S3928P-EI supports the following types of Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) module:
l l l
SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A SFP-GE-T
SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A and SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A provide GE optical ports, and SFP-GE-T provides GE electrical ports. Table 2-13 describes the specifications for optical ports on the SFP modules. Table 2-13 Specifications for optical ports on the LAN switches (S3928P-EI) Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A Multi-mode LC < 550 m 9.5 dBm to 0 dBm 17.0 dBm 3.0 dBm 850 nm SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A Single-mode LC < 10 km 9.5 dBm to 3.0 dBm 20.0 dBm 3.0 dBm 1,310 nm
2.10 BAM Server

This describes the BAM server. The RNC BAM server can use either the IBM X343-8847 or the IBM X3650T. The RNC is configured with one BAM server (single-server system) or two BAM servers (dual-server system) according to the site requirements. The BAM servers are installed at the bottom of the WRSR. The BAM servers are labeled before delivery. In the WRSR, the BAM server labeled as BAM_Upper shall be installed above the BAM server labeled as BAM_Lower. At the installation, you can set either of the two BAM servers as the active one and the other the standby one. During the running, the active and the standby can be switched over. For details of the BAM server, refer to its delivery-attached documents and the RNC BAM Administration Guide. 2.10.1 Functions of BAM In the RNC OM subsystem, the BAM works as a bridge between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Front Administration Module (FAM). 2.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)
2 WRSR Cabinet
This describes the appearance of the IBM server X3650T. The IBM X3650T has a different appearance from the IBM X343-8847. 2.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847) This describes the appearance of the IBM server X343-8847. The IBM X343-8847 has a different appearance from the IBM X3650T.
2.10.1 Functions of BAM

In the RNC OM subsystem, the BAM works as a bridge between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Front Administration Module (FAM). BAM performs the following functions:
l
Providing FAM with such functions as configuration management, performance management, fault management, security management, and loading management. Providing the M2000/LMT with the RNC OM interface and controlling communications between the M2000/LMT and the RNC host.
Figure 2-21 shows the position of the BAM in the OM subsystem.
2-32
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-21 Logical structure of OM subsystem
NOTE
The WINT shown in Figure 2-21 is not a concrete board. Instead, the WINT is a general name of all the interface boards in the WRBS. As required, the WINT boards can be WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/WOSEb/ WOSEc, WEIE, WFEE, or WFIE.
2.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)

This describes the appearance of the IBM server X3650T. The IBM X3650T has a different appearance from the IBM X343-8847. Figure 2-22 shows the appearance of the BAM server (IBM X3650T).
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-33
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-22 BAM server (IBM X3650T)
2.10.2.1 Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T) This describes the front panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the front panel of the IBM Server X3650T refer to the CD-RW drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches. 2.10.2.2 Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T) This describes the back panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the back panel of the IBM server X3650T refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, and ports.
Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)

This describes the front panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the front panel of the IBM Server X3650T refer to the CD-RW drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches. Figure 2-23 shows the front panel of the BAM server. Figure 2-23 Front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)
Table 2-14 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server. Table 2-14 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T) No. 1 2 3 Silk-Screen Mark None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch
2-34
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
No. 4
Silk-Screen Mark CRT
Description The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a critical fault occurs in the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a major fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly with the performance deteriorated significantly. The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a minor fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly. The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector. This port is not used in the RNC. USB port
MJR
MNR
PWR
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 ON NIC ID ID None
Disk 0 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty. Disk 1 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 activity LED System ID LED ID switch, used to switch system IDs Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) switch. When the NMI switch is pressed, the system is in suspended status for diagnosing faults.
Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)

This describes the back panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the back panel of the IBM server X3650T refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, and ports. Figure 2-24 shows the back panel of the BAM server.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-35
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-24 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)
Table 2-15 describes the silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server. Table 2-15 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (12) 13 14 15 1 0 1 2 Silk-Screen Mark Alarms None None None None Description DB15 port PCI card bracket (with no card inserted) PCI card bracket (with a card inserted) 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet port Power supply module PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for the mouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector RJ45 NIC 1 port RJ45 NIC 2 port Monitor interface USB port 1 USB port 0 Server management port Ultra320 SCSI port Grounding bolt
2-36
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)

This describes the appearance of the IBM server X343-8847. The IBM X343-8847 has a different appearance from the IBM X3650T. Figure 2-25 shows the appearance of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847). Figure 2-25 BAM server (IBM X343-8847)
2.10.3.1 Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847) This describes the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847). The components on the front panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the CD-ROM drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches. 2.10.3.2 Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847) This describes the back panel of the IBM X343-8847 BAM server. The components on the back panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, and ports.
Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)

This describes the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847). The components on the front panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the CD-ROM drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches. Figure 2-26 shows the front panel of the BAM server. Figure 2-26 Front panel of the BAM server
Table 2-16 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-37
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-16 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847) No. 1 2 3 4 CRT Silk-Screen Mark None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a critical fault occurs in the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a major fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly with the performance deteriorated significantly. The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that a minor fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly. The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector (This port is not used in the RNC). USB connectors
MJR
MNR
PWR
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 None 0 1 ON
Disk 0 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty. Disk 1 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 activity LED System ID LED ID switch, used to switch system IDs NMI switch. When the NMI switch is pressed, the system is in suspended status to diagnose faults.
2-38
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)

This describes the back panel of the IBM X343-8847 BAM server. The components on the back panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, and ports. Figure 2-27 shows the back panel of the BAM server. Figure 2-27 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847)
Table 2-17 describes the silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server. Table 2-17 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847) No. 1 2 3 4 5 Silk-Screen Mark Description USB port 1 Monitor port Ultra320 SCSI port RJ45 NIC 1 port Integrated interface for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Y-type cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the server. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB port 2 None 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet port Grounding bolt None Alarms DC input power socket. The socket is for receiving the 48 V input while socket + is for receiving the GND input. DB15 port RJ45 NIC 0 port
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-39
2 WRSR Cabinet
2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR Cabinet

This describes the cable connections in the WRSR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRSR cabinet refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable. 2.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR Cabinet This describes the layout of power switches on the WRSR cabinet. There is fixed relation between the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRSR cabinet and the intra-cabinet components. 2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSR Cabinet This describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR has four typical configuration, the WRSR may use the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet, and may be configured with one or two BAM servers. The connections of power cables and PGND cables are different under the previously mentioned four conditions. 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet This describes connections of signal cables in the WRSR cabinet. The signal cable connections in the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR are the same. The WRSR can be configured with one or two BAM servers. The cable connections in the WRSR with one BAM server is different from that in the WRSR with two BAM servers. When only one BAM server is configured in the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper position for BAM servers.
2.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR Cabinet

This describes the layout of power switches on the WRSR cabinet. There is fixed relation between the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRSR cabinet and the intra-cabinet components. Figure 2-28 shows the relation between the six output power control switches on the power distribution box and the components of the WRSR. Table 2-18 describes the relation between the power control switches and the components. Figure 2-28 Power supply of the WRSR
2-40
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
2 WRSR Cabinet
l l
SERVER-1 on the front panel of the power distribution box indicates the BAM_Upper. SERVER-0 on the front panel of the power distribution box indicates the BAM_Lower.
Table 2-18 Relation between the power control switches and the WRSR components Component WRSS Subrack LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 Switcher KVM WRBS Subrack GRU suite LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 BAM_Upper BAM_Lower Power Control Switch SW1, SW4 SW6 SW3 SW3 SW1 SW2, SW5 SW1, SW4 SW2 SW3 SW5 SW6
2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSR Cabinet
This describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR has four typical configuration, the WRSR may use the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet, and may be configured with one or two BAM servers. The connections of power cables and PGND cables are different under the previously mentioned four conditions. Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR when the WRSR holds two BAM servers. When only one BAM server is configured in the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper subrack for BAM servers. Only the power cables and the PGND cables of this BAM server need to be installed.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-41
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-29 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X343-8847)
Grounding bolts Power under the cabinet top distributionbox
20 21 V1 B1 V2 B2 V3 B3 V4 B4 V5 B5 V6 B6 2.1 2.2 4.1 4.2 6.1 6.2 8.1 8.2 10 11 1.1 1.2 3.1 3.2 15 16 7.1 7.2 9.19.2 12 13 5.1 5.2 34 SW 1SW 2SW3SW 4SW 5SW 6
Power distributionbox
WRSS
25
WRSS
-48V1 RTN1 1.1 5.1 1.2 5.2
MONITOR -48V2 RTN2 22 7.1 7.2 35
15.1 6.3 70
I O
16.1
36
6 2 26
WRSS
WRSS
-48V1 RTN1 3.1 3.2
MONITOR -48V2 RTN2 23 9.1 9.2 24 27
74 4.1 4.2
8 47
15.2
16.2 28 29
48 10.1 11.1 10.2 11.2
30 31 50 52
12.1 13.1 12.2 13.2 51 53 54 56 55 57
Grounding bolts on the cabinet base
Vx: -48Vx Bx: RTNx
Grounding bolts on the cabinet base
Rear view
Front view
2-42
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-30 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X3650T)
Table 2-19 describes the power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-43
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-19 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR Number 1.1, 1.2; 7.1, 7.2 5.1, 5.2 15.1, 16.1 6 2 Cable Name Power cables of the WRSS Power cables of LAN Switch-3 Power cables of LAN Switch-2 Power cable of the switcher KVM power cables (2.1 and 74.1 are connected on the same terminal to the grounding bolt that corresponds to the SW1 switch.) Power cables of the WRBS GRU suite power cables (74.1 and 2.1 are connected on the same terminal and 74.2 and 2.2 are connected on the same terminal to the grounding bolt that corresponds to the SW1 switch.) Power cables of LAN Switch-1 Power cables of LAN Switch-0 Power cables of the BAM server (BAM_Upper) Power cables of the BAM server (BAM_Lower) PGND cable of the switcher PGND cable of the WRSS PGND cable of the WRBS PGND cable of the GRU box PGND cables of the BAM server (BAM_Upper) PGND cables of the BAM server (BAM_Lower) PGND cable of the KVM PGND cable of LAN Switch-3 PGND cable of LAN Switch-2 PGND cable of LAN Switch-1 PGND cable of LAN Switch-0 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and the busbar PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cables of the cabinet busbar PGND cables of side doors on the cabinet
3.1, 3.2; 9.1, 9.2 8, 74
4.1, 4.2 15.2, 16.2 10.1, 11.1; 10.2, 11.2 12.1, 13.1; 12.2, 13.2 6.3 22 23 24 28, 29 30, 31 70 35 36 47 48 34 25 to 27 20, 21 50, 51; 54, 55
2-44
2 WRSR Cabinet
Number 52, 53; 56, 57
Cable Name PGND cables of front and back doors on the cabinet
2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet

This describes connections of signal cables in the WRSR cabinet. The signal cable connections in the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR are the same. The WRSR can be configured with one or two BAM servers. The cable connections in the WRSR with one BAM server is different from that in the WRSR with two BAM servers. When only one BAM server is configured in the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper position for BAM servers. Figure 2-31, Figure 2-32, and Figure 2-33 show the connections of the signal cables in the WRSR that is configured with two BAM servers.
NOTE
l l l
The WFIE and the WBIEb are presented as examples. The actual board type depends on the site plan. The installation positions and the quantity of the optical cables that are connected to the WLPU are presented as examples. The actual installation positions and quantity depend on the site plan. The installation positions and the quantity of the trunk cables are presented as examples. The actual installation positions and quantity depend on the site plan.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-45
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-31 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed)
2-46
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-32 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed)
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-47
2 WRSR Cabinet
Figure 2-33 Connections of WRSR signal cables (Right view)
Table 2-20 and Table 2-21 describe the WRSR signal cables.
2-48
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-20 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed) Num ber 18 Cable Name Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 DB15/Port COM3 on the back panel of the power distribution box N/Socket on the back panel of the GRU suite for the GRU suite jumper Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 DB15/Port MONITOR on the back of the WRBS N/Lightning arrestor on the cabinet top -
Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box GRU suite jumper
17, 73
This cable is optional. It is the accessory of the GRU suite. The number of jumpers is the same as that of the GRU suites. When the RNC is configured with one GRU suite, the connection position 1 of cable 14 is the port PPS2 on the front panel of the GRU suite. When the RNC is configured with one GRU suite, the connection position 1 of cable 78 is port COM2 on the front panel of the GRU suite. When the RNC uses one BAM server, this cable is not required. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable.
76
PPS output signal cable of the GRU suite PPS output signal cable of the GRU suite
RJ45/Port PPS1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite RJ45/Port PPS1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
RJ45/Port 1PPS on the WMUXb in slot 7 RJ45/Port 1PPS on the WMUXb in slot 8
14
77
Maintenance signal cable of the GRU suite Maintenance signal cable of the GRU suite
RJ45/Port COM1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite RJ45/Port COM1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
RJ45/Port COM1 on the WMUXb in slot 7 RJ45/Port COM1 on the WMUXb in slot 8
78
19
Inter- BAM server heartbeat signal cable WMPU Ethernet cable WMPU Ethernet cable
RJ45/Serial port on the BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port ETH on the WMPU in slot 1 RJ45/Ethernet port ETH on the WMPU in slot 0
RJ45/Serial port on the BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 2 on LAN Switch-1
37
38
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-49
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 39
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) /Ports for the keyboard, mouse, and monitor on the KVM RJ45/Ethernet port 6 on LAN Switch-1
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 7 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 7 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 2 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 8 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 8 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 4 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 3 on LAN Switch-1 /Ports for the keyboard, mouse, and monitor on the switcher RJ45/Ethernet port 6 on LAN Switch-0 This cable is an accessory of the KVM. This cable is used to connect the the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 with the external network when the GE connection is not available. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable.
Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Signal cable connecting the KVM and the switcher External cascading Ethernet cable of the LAN switch
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
58
2-50
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 59
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 5 on LAN Switch-1
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 5 on LAN Switch-0 This cable is used for the connection between the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 in the internal network when the GE connection is not available. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable. The Y-shaped mouse-keyboard cable 60.2 of the BAM server and the monitormouse-keyboard cable 60 of the switcher are accessories. This Y-shaped mouse-keyboard cable 61.2 of the BAM server and the monitormouse-keyboard cable 61 of the switcher are accessories. -
Internal cascading Ethernet cable of the LAN switch
60.2
Mousekeyboard signal cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper)
/Mouse-keyboard integrated port on BAM server (BAM_Upper)
60
61.2
Mousekeyboard signal cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower)
/Mouse-keyboard integrated port on BAM server (BAM_Lower)
61
60
Monitormousekeyboard cable of the switcher Monitormousekeyboard cable of the switcher
/Serial port 2 on the back panel of the switcher /Serial port 1 on the back panel of the switcher
60.1, 60.2
61
61.1, 61.2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-51
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 71
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 4 on LAN Switch-1
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-3 This cable is used to connect the LAN Switch-1 and the LAN Switch-3 with the internal network so as to monitor and manage the LAN Switch-3. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable. This cable is used to connect the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-2 with the internal network so as to monitor and manage the LAN Switch-2. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable. The connectors need to be prepared on site. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. The connectors need to be prepared on site. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
72
RJ45/Ethernet port 3 on LAN Switch-0
79
Ethernet cable of the LMT
RJ45/Ethernet port on the LMT or Ethernet port on the hub
80
2-52
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 81
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port CLK1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite RJ45/Port CLK1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port CLK IN0 on When the RNC the WNET/WNETc in is configured slot 7 with one GRU suite, the RJ45/Port CLK IN0 on connection the WNET/WNETc in position 1 of slot 8 cable 82 is the port CLK2 on the front panel of the GRU suite. LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 4 The slot number and optical port number are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the optical cables depend on the site plan. The cable is optional. It is used only when the RNC uses the BITS clock as the clock source. This part takes port CLK IN2 as an example. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. The ports on the WFEEs/WFIEs are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the Ethernet cables depend on the site plan. The WFEEs/WFIEs
Clock output signal cable of the GRU suite Clock output signal cable of the GRU suite
82
83
Optical cable connecting the WMUXb to the WLPU in the WRSR Optical cable connecting the WMUXb to the WLPU in the WRSR BITS clock cable
SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 7 SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 8 SMB/BITS clock source
84
LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 5
87
SMB/Port CLK IN2 or port CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 7 SMB/Port CLK IN2 or port CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8
88
BITS clock cable
SMB/BITS clock source
89
Ethernet cable connecting the WFEE/WFIE to the LAN switch
RJ45/FE port on the WFEE/WFIE in slot 0 in subrack 1
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-53
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 90
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 RJ45/FE port on the WFEE/WFIE in slot 0 in subrack 1
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 12 on LAN Switch-0 can also be connected to another device directly and the actual installation positions depend on the site plan. When the WFEEs/WFIEs are connected to another device through the LAN switches, the WFEEs/WFIEs are connected to the LAN switches, as described in Table 2-22.
91
Trunk cable connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc/
Trunk cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc/
/Another device
/WEIE/WFEE WEIE/WFEE to electrical port another device
The electrical port here is presented as an example. The actual installation position depends on the site plan. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
2-54
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 92
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 SMB/Port CLK1 on the WBIEb/ WOSEc in slot 15
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 SMB/Port CLK IN2 or CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8 The clock cable is optional. It is used only when the RNC receives timing signals from the WBIEb/ WOSEc. This part takes port CLK IN2 as an example. This cable is used to connect LAN switches when the WFEE/ WFIE uses the LAN switches to converge data streams on the FE ports. You can choose optical cables or Ethernet cables according to the configurations of the LAN switches. The information here is an example based on optical cables. The subrack number, slot number and optical port number are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the optical cable depend on the site plan. The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray
Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc
93
GE cable connecting LAN switches GE cable connecting LAN switches
SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/Port 25 on LAN Switch-0 SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/Port 25 on LAN Switch-2
94
Optical cable connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR
SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 7 in subrack 3
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-55
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 2
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 8 in subrack 3
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 3 to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
2-56
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 3
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 9
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 /Another device The slot number, optical port number and optical port type are presented as an example. The actual installation positions of the optical cable depend on the site plan. The connector type depends on the site plan. The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
Optical cable connecting the WLPU in the WRSS to another device
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-57
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 4-7
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/Connection Position 2 SC/PC LC/PC or RJ45/Port 26 on the LAN Switch-0, LAN Switch-1, LAN Switch-2, or LAN Switch-3.
Connector Type 2/ Remarks Connection Position 2 /Another device The cables are used to connect LAN switches to a device when the WFIEs connect to the device through the LAN switches. You can choose optical cables or Ethernet cables according to the configurations of the LAN switches. The information here is an example based on optical cables and overhead cabling.
Cables connecting LAN switches and another device
Table 2-21 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed) Num ber 18 Cable Name Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 DB15/Port COM3 on the back panel of the power distribution box N/Socket on the back panel of the GRU suite for the GRU suite jumper Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 DB15/Port MONITOR on the back of the WRBS N/Lightning arrestor on the cabinet top Remarks
Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box GRU suite jumper
17, 73
This cable is optional. It is the accessory of the GRU suite. The number of jumpers is the same as that of the GRU suites.
2-58
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 76
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port PPS1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite RJ45/Port PPS1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port 1PPS on the WMUXb in slot 7 RJ45/Port 1PPS on the WMUXb in slot 8
Remarks
PPS output signal cable of the GRU suite PPS output signal cable of the GRU suite
14
When the RNC is configured with one GRU suite, the connection position 1 of cable 14 is the port PPS2 on the front panel of the GRU suite. When the RNC is configured with one GRU suite, the connection position 1 of cable 78 is port COM2 on the front panel of the GRU suite. When the RNC uses one BAM server, this cable is not required. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable.
77
Maintenance signal cable of the GRU suite Maintenance signal cable of the GRU suite
RJ45/Port COM1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite RJ45/Port COM1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
RJ45/Port COM1 on the WMUXb in slot 7 RJ45/Port COM1 on the WMUXb in slot 8
78
19
Inter-server heartbeat signal cable
RJ45/Serial port on the BAM server (BAM_Upper)
RJ45/Serial port on the BAM server (BAM_Lower)
37
WMPU Ethernet cable WMPU Ethernet cable Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower)
RJ45/Ethernet port ETH on the WMPU in slot 1 RJ45/Ethernet port ETH on the WMPU in slot 0 RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower)
RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 2 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 7 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 7 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 2 on LAN Switch-0
38
39
40
41
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-59
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 42
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) RJ45/Ethernet port on BAM server (BAM_Upper) /Ports for the keyboard, mouse, and monitor on the KVM RJ45/Ethernet port 6 on LAN Switch-1
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 8 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 8 on LAN Switch-1 RJ45/Ethernet port 4 on LAN Switch-0 RJ45/Ethernet port 3 on LAN Switch-1
Remarks
Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Ethernet cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Signal cable connecting the KVM and the switcher External cascading Ethernet cable of the LAN switch
43
44
45
46
49
/Ports for the This cable is keyboard, mouse, and an accessory monitor on the switcher of the KVM. RJ45/Ethernet port 6 on LAN Switch-0 This cable is used to the connect the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 with the external network when the GE connection is not available. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable.
58
2-60
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 59
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Ethernet port 5 on LAN Switch-1
Remarks
This cable is used to connect the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 with the internal network when the GE connection is not available. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable. Monitormousekeyboard cable 60 of the switcher Monitormousekeyboard cable 61 of the switcher This cable is used for the connection between the LAN Switch-1 and the LAN Switch-3 in the internal network to monitor and manage the LAN Switch-3. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable.
60
Monitormousekeyboard cable of the switcher Monitormousekeyboard cable of the switcher Internal cascading Ethernet cable of the LAN switch
/Serial port 2 on the back panel of the switcher
Port for the mousekeyboard signal cable of BAM server (BAM_Upper) Port for the mousekeyboard signal cable of BAM server (BAM_Lower) RJ45/Ethernet port 1 on LAN Switch-3
61
/Serial port 1 on the back panel of the switcher
71
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-61
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 72
Cable Name
Remarks
This cable is used for the connection between the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-2 in the internal network to monitor and manage the LAN Switch-2. There are printed messages on both ends of the Ethernet cable. The connectors need to be prepared on site. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. The connectors need to be prepared on site. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. When the RNC is configured with one GRU suite, the connection position 1 of
79
80
81
Clock output signal cable of the GRU suite
RJ45/Port CLK1 on the front panel of the left GRU suite
RJ45/Port CLK IN0 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 7
2-62
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 82
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port CLK1 on the front panel of the right GRU suite
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/Port CLK IN0 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8
Remarks
Clock output signal cable of the GRU suite
cable 82 is the port CLK2 on the front panel of the GRU suite.
83
Optical cable connecting the WMUXb to the WLPU in the WRSR Optical cable connecting the WMUXb to the WLPU in the WRSR
SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 7
84
SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 8
The slot number and optical port number are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the optical cables depend on the site plan. The cables are optional. They are used only when the RNC uses the BITS clock as the clock source. This part takes port CLK IN2 as an example. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. The ports on the WFEEs/ WFIEs are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the Ethernet
87
BITS clock cable
SMB/Port CLK IN2 or port CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 7 SMB/Port CLK IN2 or port CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8
88
BITS clock cable
89
RJ45/FE port on the WFEE/WFIE in slot 0 in subrack 1
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-63
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 90
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/FE port on the WFEE/WFIE in slot 0 in subrack 1
Remarks
cables depend on the site plan. The WFEEs/ WFIEs can also connect to another device directly and the actual installation positions depend on the site plan. If the WFEEs/ WFIEs connect to another device through the LAN switches, connect the WFEEs/ WFIEs to the LAN switches as described in Table 2-22.
91
Trunk cable connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc/ WEIE/WFEE to another device
Trunk cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc/ /WEIE/WFEE electrical port
/Another device
The electrical port here is presented as an example. The actual installation position depends on the site plan. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
2-64
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 92
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 SMB/Port CLK1 on the WBIEb/WOSEc in slot 15
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 SMB/Port CLK IN2 or CLK IN3 on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8
Remarks
Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc and the WNET/ WNETc
The clock cable is optional. It is used only when the RNC receives timing signals from the WBIEb/ WOSEc. This part takes port CLK IN2 as an example. This cable is used to connect LAN switches when WFEE/WFIE uses the LAN switches to converge data streams on the FE ports. You can choose optical cables or Ethernet cables according to the configurations of the LAN switches. The information here is an example based on optical cables. The subrack number, slot number and optical port number are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of
93
GE cable connecting LAN switches GE cable connecting LAN switches
SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/ Port 25 on LAN Switch-1 SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/ Port 25 on LAN Switch-3
94
SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 7 in subrack 3
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-65
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 2
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb in slot 8 in subrack 3
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 3
Remarks
the optical cable depend on the site plan. The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
2-66
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 3
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU in slot 9
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 /Another device
Remarks
Optical cable connecting the WLPU in the WRSS to another device
The slot number, optical port number and optical port type are presented as an example. The actual installation positions of the optical cable depend on the site plan. The connector type depends on the site plan. The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-67
2 WRSR Cabinet
Num ber 4-7
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 2 LC/PC SC/PC or RJ45/Port 26 on the LAN Switch-0, LAN Switch-1, LAN Switch-2, or LAN Switch-3.
Remarks
Cables connecting LAN switches and another device
The cables are used to connect LAN switches to a device when the WFIEs connect to the device through the LAN switches. You can choose optical cables or Ethernet cables according to the configurations of the LAN switches. The information here is an example based on optical cables and overhead cabling.
Table 2-22 describes the connection between the WFEEs/WFIEs and the LAN switches when the WRSR is in full configuration and in the assumption that the WRBSs all use LAN switches to converge data streams on the FE ports.
NOTE
The WFIE and the ports on the WFIE are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the Ethernet cables depend on the site plan. The WFEEs/WFIEs can also connect to another device directly and the actual installation positions depend on the site plan.
Table 2-22 Connection between the WFIE and the LAN switches Connection Position 1 Subrack No. Subrack 1 Slot No. Slot 0 Slot 0 FE Port FE 0 FE 1 Connection Position 2 LAN Switch LAN Switch-0 Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch Ethernet port 11 Ethernet port 12
2-68
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Connection Position 1 Subrack No. Slot No. Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 3 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 4 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 5 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 6 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 7 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 8 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 9 Slot 0 Slot 0 FE Port FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1
Connection Position 2 LAN Switch LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-0 LAN Switch-1 LAN Switch-2 Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch Ethernet port 11 Ethernet port 12 Ethernet port 13 Ethernet port 14 Ethernet port 13 Ethernet port 14 Ethernet port 15 Ethernet port 16 Ethernet port 15 Ethernet port 16 Ethernet port 17 Ethernet port 18 Ethernet port 17 Ethernet port 18 Ethernet port 19 Ethernet port 20 Ethernet port 19 Ethernet port 20 Ethernet port 21 Ethernet port 22 Ethernet port 21 Ethernet port 22 Ethernet port 23 Ethernet port 24 Ethernet port 23 Ethernet port 24 Ethernet port 7 Ethernet port 8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-69
2 WRSR Cabinet
Connection Position 1 Subrack No. Slot No. Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 10 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 11 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 12 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 13 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 14 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 15 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 16 Slot 0 Slot 0 FE Port FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1
Connection Position 2 LAN Switch LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch Ethernet port 7 Ethernet port 8 Ethernet port 9 Ethernet port 10 Ethernet port 9 Ethernet port 10 Ethernet port 11 Ethernet port 12 Ethernet port 11 Ethernet port 12 Ethernet port 13 Ethernet port 14 Ethernet port 13 Ethernet port 14 Ethernet port 15 Ethernet port 16 Ethernet port 15 Ethernet port 16 Ethernet port 17 Ethernet port 18 Ethernet port 17 Ethernet port 18 Ethernet port 19 Ethernet port 20 Ethernet port 19 Ethernet port 20 Ethernet port 21 Ethernet port 22
2-70
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2 WRSR Cabinet
Connection Position 1 Subrack No. Slot No. Slot 15 Slot 15 Subrack 17 Slot 0 Slot 0 Slot 15 Slot 15 FE Port FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1 FE 0 FE 1
Connection Position 2 LAN Switch LAN Switch-3 LAN Switch-2 LAN Switch-3 Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch Ethernet port 21 Ethernet port 22 Ethernet port 23 Ethernet port 24 Ethernet port 23 Ethernet port 24
2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR Cabinet

This describes the engineering specifications for the WRSR cabinet. The engineering specifications for the N68-22 WRSR and N68-22-N WRSR include structural specifications and electrical specifications. Table 2-23 describes the structural specifications of the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR.
NOTE
The empty cabinet refers to a rack installed with only front, back and side doors.
Table 2-23 Structural specifications of the WRSR Item Dimension Usable space height Specification 2200 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 800 mm (D) N68-22: 46 U (1 U 44.45 mm) N68-22-N: 45 U (1 U 44.45 mm) Weight N68-22: Rack 75 kg; Empty cabinet 130 kg; Fullyconfigured cabinet 350 kg N68-22-N: Rack: 105 kg; empty cabinet 170 kg; fullyconfigured cabinet 350 kg Floor bearing weight 450 kg/m2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
2-71
2 WRSR Cabinet
Table 2-24 describes the electrical specifications of the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR. Table 2-24 Electrical specifications of the WRSR Item Power supply Electromagnetic compatibility Power consumption in full configuration Heat dissipation Specification Rated input voltage: -48 V DC; Input voltage range: -40 V DC to -57 V DC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.3.1 (2001-09). 2600 W 2080W
2-72
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
3
About This Chapter
WRBR Cabinet
This describes the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR performs the service processing function of the RNC. It is optional. The RNC can be configured with zero to five WRBRs as required. 3.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets This describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance. 3.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet This describes the components of the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the same while the internal configurations are slightly different. 3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR Cabinet This describes the cable connections in the WRBR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRBR refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable. 3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR Cabinet This describes the engineering specifications for the WRBR cabinet. The engineering specifications for the N68-22 and N68-22-N WRBR include structural specifications and electrical specifications.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-1
3 WRBR Cabinet
3.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets

This describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance. The appearance of the RNC cabinet is shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet
3.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet

This describes the components of the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the same while the internal configurations are slightly different. 3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22) This describes components of the N68-22 WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, the WRBS, and optical cable tray. 3.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N) This describes components of the N68-22-N WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRBS, and optical cable tray.
3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22)

This describes components of the N68-22 WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, the WRBS, and optical cable tray. Figure 3-2 shows the assembly of the N68-22 WRBR.
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-2 N68-22 WRBR assembly diagram (front view)
(1) Filler panel (3) WRBS
(2) Optical cable tray (4) Power distribution box
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-3
3 WRBR Cabinet
CAUTION
The N68-22 WRBR is 46U high inside. There is a 1 U filler panel at the bottom of the N68-22 WRBR. Table 3-1 describes the configuration of the WRBR. Table 3-1 WRBR configuration Component Power distribution box WRBS Optical cable tray Configuration 1, mandatory 1 to 3, mandatory 1, mandatory Refer to ... 2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box 5 WRBS Subrack 2.7 Optical Cable Tray
3.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N)

This describes components of the N68-22-N WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the power distribution box, WRBS, and optical cable tray. Figure 3-3 shows an assembly of the N68-22-N WRBR.
3-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-3 N68-22-N WRBR assembly diagram (front view)
(1) Optical cable tray
(2) WRBS
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-5
3 WRBR Cabinet
CAUTION
The N68-22-N WRBR is 45U high inside. There is no filler panel at the bottom of the N68-22N WRBR. Table 3-2 describes the configuration of the WRBR. Table 3-2 WRBR configuration Component Power distribution box WRBS Optical cable tray Configuration 1, mandatory 1 to 3, mandatory 1, mandatory Refer to ... 2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box 5 WRBS Subrack 2.7 Optical Cable Tray
3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR Cabinet

This describes the cable connections in the WRBR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRBR refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable. 3.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR Cabinet This describes the layout of power switches on the WRBR cabinet. There is a fixed relationship between the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRBR and the intracabinet components. 3.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBR Cabinet The connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68-22 cabinet are different from those in the N68-22-N cabinet. 3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet This describes connections of signal cables in the WRBR cabinet. The signal cables in the WRBR include the following: the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, the optical cables connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR, the optical cables connecting the WOSEc in the WRBS to another device, the trunk cables connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to another device, and the Ethernet cables connecting the WFEEs/WFIEs in the WRBR to the LAN switches in the WRSR.
3.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR Cabinet

This describes the layout of power switches on the WRBR cabinet. There is a fixed relationship between the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRBR and the intracabinet components. Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 show the relationship between the six power control switches of the power distribution box and the components of the WRBR.
3-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-4 Power supply of the WRBR
Table 3-3 Relationship between the power control switches and the components Component WRBS (upper) WRBS (middle) WRBS (lower) Power Control Switch SW1, SW4 SW2, SW5 SW3, SW6
3.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBR Cabinet
The connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68-22 cabinet are different from those in the N68-22-N cabinet. Figure 3-5 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR.
NOTE
The grounding bolts on the cabinet base are used to fix the PGND cables of the cabinet doors. The number of the grounding bolts for the N68-22 cabinet is different from that for the N68-22-N cabinet. The following takes the N68-22-N cabinet as an example. For the installation of the PGND cables, refer to Installing PGND Cables to RNC Cabinet Doors.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-7
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRBR
Table 3-4 describes the power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR.
3-8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Table 3-4 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR Number 1.16.2 8, 9 1012 1315 16, 17, 39, 40 20 18, 19, 41, 42 Cable Name Power cables of the WRBS PGND cables of the cabinet busbar PGND cables of the subrack PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cables of the cabinet side doors PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and the busbar PGND cables of the cabinet front and back doors
3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet

This describes connections of signal cables in the WRBR cabinet. The signal cables in the WRBR include the following: the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, the optical cables connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR, the optical cables connecting the WOSEc in the WRBS to another device, the trunk cables connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to another device, and the Ethernet cables connecting the WFEEs/WFIEs in the WRBR to the LAN switches in the WRSR. Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 show the connections of the WRBR signal cables.
NOTE
l l
The types of the interface boards in the WRBS are presented as an example. The actual board type depends on the site plan. The quantity of the trunk cables is presented as an example. The actual quantity depends on the site plan.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-9
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-6 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (1)
3-10
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Figure 3-7 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (2)
Table 3-5 describes the signal cables in the WRBR.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-11
3 WRBR Cabinet
Table 3-5 Signal cables in the WRBR Number Cable Name Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 DB15/Port COM4 on the back panel of the power distribution box SC/PC/Optical ports TX and RX on the WMUXb Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 DB15/Port MONITOR on the back of the lowest WRBS LC/PC/Optical port on the WLPU Remarks
Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box Optical cables connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR
2126
The actual installation positions of the optical cables depend on the site plan. The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
3-12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Number
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 LC/PC/Optical port on the WOSEc
Remarks
2728
Optical cables connecting the WOSEc in the WRBS to another device
The optical cable runs through the optical cable tray to the back of the cabinet. The surplus part of the optical cable needs to be coiled up in the optical cable box at the back of the cabinet. Connector type 2 depends on the type of the connected device. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling. The actual quantity of the trunk cables depends on the site plan. Connector type 2 depends on the type of the connected device. The information here is an example based on overhead cabling.
2930
Trunk cables connecting the WBIEb/ WOSEc /WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS to another device
DB50/Electrical port on the WBIEb/ WOSEc/WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS
/Another device
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-13
3 WRBR Cabinet
Number
Cable Name
Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 RJ45/FE port on the WFEE/ WFIE
Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/ Corresponding port on the LAN switch
Remarks
3138
Ethernet cables connecting the WFEEs/WFIEs in the WRBR to the LAN switches in the WRSR
The ports on the WFEEs/WFIEs are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of the Ethernet cables depend on the site plan. The WFEEs/WFIEs can also connect to another device directly and the actual installation positions depend on the site plan. If the WFEEs/WFIEs connect to another device through the LAN switches, connect the WFEEs/WFIEs to the LAN switches as described in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR Cabinet

This describes the engineering specifications for the WRBR cabinet. The engineering specifications for the N68-22 and N68-22-N WRBR include structural specifications and electrical specifications. Table 3-6 describes the structural specifications of the N68-22 WRBR and the N68-22-N WRBR.
NOTE
The empty cabinet refers to a rack installed with only front, back and side doors.
3-14
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3 WRBR Cabinet
Table 3-6 Structural specifications of the WRBR Item Dimension Usable space height Specification 2200 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 800 mm (D) N68-22: 46 U (1 U 44.45 mm) N68-22-N: 45 U (1 U 44.45 mm) Weight N68-22: Rack 75 kg; Empty cabinet 130 kg; Fully-configured cabinet 350 kg N68-22-N: Rack: 105 kg; empty cabinet 170 kg; fully-configured cabinet 350 kg Floor bearing weight 450 kg/m2
Table 3-7 describes the electrical specifications of the N68-22 WRBR and the N68-22-N WRBR. Table 3-7 Electrical specifications of the WRBR Item Power supply Electromagnetic compatibility Power consumption in full configuration Heat dissipation Specification Rated input voltage: -48 V DC; Input voltage range: -40 V DC to -57 V DC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.3.1 (2001-09). 2400 W 1920W
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
3-15
4 WRSS Subrack
4
About This Chapter
WRSS Subrack
This describes the WRSS subrack. The WRSS is configured in the WRSR. The RNC must be configured with one and only one WRSS. The WRSS exchanges data, processes PS services, and provides timing signals for the system. 4.1 Components of the WRSS Subrack This describes components of the WRSS subrack. The WRSS consists of the fan drawer, the boards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets. 4.2 Fan Drawer This describes the fan drawer. The fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. Each subrack must be configured with one fan drawer. 4.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack This describes boards in the WRSS subrack. There are 15 slots in the WRSS. Among the slots, slot 7 and slot 8 are 1.5 times the other slots in width. The WRSS subrack can house the following types of board: the WMPU, WLPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc. 4.4 Inter-Subrack Connection This describes the inter-subrack connection. The RNC subracks are of two types: the WRSS subrack and the WRBS subrack. Usually, one WRSS subrack is configured. One to sixteen WRBS subracks are configured according to the service requirements. The WRSS subrack connects each WRBS subrack in a star topology, and thus transmits data between the WRSS subrack and the WRBS subracks and provides clock. 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough This describes the transverse cable trough. It is used to lead the cables from the front of the subrack to both sides of the cabinet. 4.6 Air Inlets This describes air inlets. The air inlet provides the air intake path for heat dissipation of the cabinet. 4.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS Subrack
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4-1
4 WRSS Subrack
This describes the engineering specifications for the WRSS subrack. The engineering specifications for the WRSS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
4-2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4 WRSS Subrack
4.1 Components of the WRSS Subrack

This describes components of the WRSS subrack. The WRSS consists of the fan drawer, the boards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets. The RNC uses the 14 U shielding subrack of Huawei. Figure 4-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 4-1 Structure of the subrack
(1) Fan drawer (3) Guide rail (5) Air inlet (7) Board (9) Product label
(2) Hanger (4) Transverse cable trough (6) Handle (8) Huawei logo
Table 4-1 describes the components of the WRSS. Table 4-1 Components of the WRSS Component Fan drawer Boards in the WRSS Horizontal cable trough
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Description Refer to 4.2 Fan Drawer. Refer to 4.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack. Refer to 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough.
4-3
4 WRSS Subrack
Component Air inlets
Description Refer to 4.6 Air Inlets.
4.2 Fan Drawer

This describes the fan drawer. The fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. Each subrack must be configured with one fan drawer.
CAUTION
The fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. If you need to pull it out when the system is running, the interruption duration must not exceed one minute. Otherwise, the boards may be damaged due to overtemperature.
Appearance of Fan drawer

Figure 4-2 shows the fan drawer. Figure 4-2 Fan drawer
(1) Internal signal cable (4) Screw
(2) WCDMA RNC Fan Status Monitoring Unit (WFSM) (5) LED
(3) Handle (6) Fan
LED on the Fan Drawer

The LED on the fan drawer has two colors, as described in Table 4-2.
4-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4 WRSS Subrack
Table 4-2 LED on the fan drawer Colo r Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s Meaning The fan drawer works properly. The fan drawer is not registered. That is,
l
In the WRSS, the communication between the fan drawer and the WMPU is not established. In the WRBS, the communication between the fan drawer and the WMUXb is not established.
Red
ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s
The fan drawer is faulty.
For details about setting the address of the fan drawer, refer to 6.7 WFSM Board.
4.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack

This describes boards in the WRSS subrack. There are 15 slots in the WRSS. Among the slots, slot 7 and slot 8 are 1.5 times the other slots in width. The WRSS subrack can house the following types of board: the WMPU, WLPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc. Figure 4-3 shows the WRSS in full configuration. Figure 4-3 WRSS in full configuration
CAUTION
Ensure that each board is in the proper position. Do not insert a WRBS board into the WRSS, or a WRSS board into the WRBS. Otherwise, the board may be damaged.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4-5
4 WRSS Subrack
For details of the boards in the WRSS, refer to 6 RNC Boards.
4.4 Inter-Subrack Connection

This describes the inter-subrack connection. The RNC subracks are of two types: the WRSS subrack and the WRBS subrack. Usually, one WRSS subrack is configured. One to sixteen WRBS subracks are configured according to the service requirements. The WRSS subrack connects each WRBS subrack in a star topology, and thus transmits data between the WRSS subrack and the WRBS subracks and provides clock. A pair of 2LC/PC-2SC/PC optical cables are used to connect the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack. The LC/PC connector of the optical cable connects to the active/standby port on the active/standby WLPU board in the WRSS subrack while the other SC/PC connector of the optical cable connects to the RX/TX port on the active/standby WMUX/WMUXb board in a WRBS subrack. The 1+1 backup system is supported in this topology. The connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 Connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack
4-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4 WRSS Subrack
4.5 Transverse Cable Trough

This describes the transverse cable trough. It is used to lead the cables from the front of the subrack to both sides of the cabinet.
4.6 Air Inlets

This describes air inlets. The air inlet provides the air intake path for heat dissipation of the cabinet.
4.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS Subrack

This describes the engineering specifications for the WRSS subrack. The engineering specifications for the WRSS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration. Table 4-3 describes the engineering specifications of the WRSS. Table 4-3 Engineering specifications of the WRSS Item Dimension Usable space height Weight Power consumption in full configuration Specification 620 mm (H) x 436 mm (W) x 420 mm (D) 14 U 26 kg for the empty WRSS; no greater than 48 kg for the WRSS with boards 1280 W
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
4-7
5 WRBS Subrack
5
About This Chapter
WRBS Subrack
This describes the WRBS subrack. The WRBS subrack is installed in the WRSR and the WRBR. It is optional. The RNC should be configured with at least one WRBS. The quantity of WRBSs configured for the RNC varies from 1 to 16 according to the system capacity required for the engineering. The main functions of the WRBS are performing protocol processing on the control plane, performing AAL2 switching and termination of the service data on the user plane, and performing related protocol processing on the user plane. The WRBS provides E1/T1 transmission ports and channelized STM-1 ATM transmission ports for the Iu, Iu-BC, Iur, and Iub interfaces. It also provides E1/T1 IP transmission ports and FE IP transmission ports for the Iu, Iur interface. 5.1 Components of the WRBS Subrack This describes components of the WRBS subrack. The WRBS consists of the fan drawer, the boards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets. 5.2 Boards in the WRBS Subrack The WRBS subrack has 16 slots that hold the following types of boards: ATM interface boards (including the WBIE/WBIEb and WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc), IP interface boards (including the WEIE, WFEE, and WFIE), WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, and WSPUb. 5.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS Subrack This describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS subrack. The engineering specifications for the WRBS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
5-1
5 WRBS Subrack
5.1 Components of the WRBS Subrack

This describes components of the WRBS subrack. The WRBS consists of the fan drawer, the boards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets. The RNC uses the 14 U shielding subrack of Huawei. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack
(1) Fan drawer (3) Guide rail (5) Air inlet (7) Board (9) Product label
(2) Hanger (4) Transverse cable trough (6) Handle (8) Huawei logo
Table 5-1 describes the components of the WRBS. Table 5-1 Components of the WRBS Component Fan drawer Boards in the WRBS Description Refer to 4.2 Fan Drawer. Refer to 5.2 Boards in the WRBS Subrack.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
5-2
5 WRBS Subrack
Component Horizontal cable trough Air inlets
Description Refer to 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough. Refer to 4.6 Air Inlets.
5.2 Boards in the WRBS Subrack

The WRBS subrack has 16 slots that hold the following types of boards: ATM interface boards (including the WBIE/WBIEb and WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc), IP interface boards (including the WEIE, WFEE, and WFIE), WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, and WSPUb. Slots to hold the boards in the WRBS subrack are as follows:
l
Slots 0 and 15 hold the WINT (the interface board in the WRBS), WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/ WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, and WFEE. Slots 7 and 8 hold WMUXs/WMUXbs. Slots 10 and 11 hold WSPUbs. Slots 2, 4, 5, and 13 hold WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs.
l l l
Slots 3, 6, 9 and 12:

l
They can hold the WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs according to the total board processing capability of the WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs in the subrack. In a WRBS subrack, the full configuration for WFMR, WFMRb, and WFMRc is 10, 8 and 4 respectively.
Slots 1 and 14: They can be configured with the WFMR/WFMRb or WFIE based on actual situations.
l
When the Iu/Iur interface uses the IP transmission, each WRBS subrack must be configured with two WFIEs in warm backup mode. WFIEs in slots 0 and 15 can be shared by both Iu/ Iur and Iub interfaces. You can also configure the boards in slots 1 and 14 independently. When slots 1 and 14 are not configured with WFIEs, you can configure the WFMRs/ WFMRbs according to the total board processing capability of the WFMR/WFMRb in the subrack.
Depending on different interfaces in different transmission modes, three typical full configurations of the boards in the WRBS subrack are as follows (Here WFMRc is presented as an example):
Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based)

If the IP transmission mode is not used over Iur/Iu interfaces , slots 0 and 15 are used to hold WINTs for the Iub interface. The full configuration for boards in the WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 5-2.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
5-3
5 WRBS Subrack
Figure 5-2 Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based)
Full Configuration (WFIEs Shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface)

If the IP over Ethernet transmission mode is used over the Iub/Iur/Iu interface, WFIEs held in slots 0 and 15 can be shared with the Iub/Iur/Iu interface. The full configuration for boards in the WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Full Configuration (WFIEs shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface)
Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, IP Based, WFIEs in Slots 1 and 14 Used)

If IP transmission mode is used over the Iur/Iu interface and slots 0 and 15 are not configured with WFIEs, you need to especially configure the WFIE interface boards for the Iu/Iur interface in slots 1 and 14. The full configuration for boards in the WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 5-4.
5-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
5 WRBS Subrack
Figure 5-4 Full configuration (Iur/Iu interface, IP based, WFIEs in slots 1 and 14 used)
5.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS Subrack

This describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS subrack. The engineering specifications for the WRBS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration. Table 5-2 describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS. Table 5-2 Engineering specifications of the WRBS Item Dimension Usable space height Weight Power consumption in full configuration Specification 620 mm (H) x 436 mm (W) x 420 mm (D) 14 U 26 kg for the empty WRSS; no greater than 48 kg for the WRSS with boards 800 W
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
5-5
6 RNC Boards
6
About This Chapter
RNC Boards
This describes the RNC boards. The RNC boards include the following: WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/ WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, WFEE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, WSPUb, WFSM, WOPB, WDMB, WLPU, WMPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc. 6.1 RNC Board Compatibility This describes the RNC board compatibility. The RNC board compatibility defines whether the RNC boards of different types can be configured in the same subrack at the same time. The WRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS subrack and the WRSS boards can not be configured in WRBS subrack. The WRBS board compatibility the same as WRSS. The RNC board compatibility is categorized into the WRSS board compatibility and the WRBS board compatibility. 6.2 WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes the WBIE/WBIEb board. WBIE/WBIEb: WCDMA RNC Interface Board. The WBIE/WBIEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. 6.3 WEIE Board This describes the WEIE board. WEIE: WCDMA RNC WRBS packet over 32-port E1/T1 interface board. The WEIE is an Iub interface board. The WEIE boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. 6.4 WFEE Board This describes the WFEE board. WFEE: WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE and 16-port E1/T1 mixed interface board. The WFEE is an Iub interface board. The WFEE boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. 6.5 WFIE Board This describes the WFIE board. The WFIE is shortened from WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE interface board. The WFIE is configured in slots 0 and 15 in subrack WRBS as the Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WFIE can also be configured in slots 1 and 14 as the Iur/Iu interface board. 6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc:(WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board): WFMR, that is, the WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board, has two types: WFMRb and WFMRc. The former type is the enhanced type I, and the latter one is the enhanced type II. The WFMRs/
6 RNC Boards
WFMRbs/WFMRcs are configured in the WRBS subrack. A maximum of ten WFMRs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. And the WFMRs are inserted in slot 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, and 14 in turn; A maximum of eight WFMRbs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. The WFMRbs are inserted in slot 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 and 13 in turn; A maximum of four WFMRcs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. The WFMRcs are inserted in slot 2, 4, 5, and 13 in turn. 6.7 WFSM Board This describes the WFSM board. WFSM is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Fan Status Monitoring Unit. It is installed at the rear of the fan drawer. 6.8 WHPU Board This describes the WHPU board. The WHPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC High speed Packet processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The N:1 (N < 5) resource pool mode is adopted, and thus the WRSS can hold up to five WHPUs in slots 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 according to the actual traffic volume. 6.9 WLPU Board This describes the WLPU board. The WLPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Line Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS can hold up to six WLPUs in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9 according to the actual traffic volume. The WLPU is an Iu/Iur/Iub interface board and is used to connect the WRBS with the WRSS. 6.10 WMPU Board This describes the WMPU board. The WMPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC switch module Main Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS holds two WMPUs in slots 0 and 1. The two boards work in the active/standby mode. 6.11 WMUX/WMUXb Board This describes the WMUX and WMUXb boards. The WMUX is shortened from the WCDMA RNC system MUltipleXing board, and the WMUXb is the enhanced version of the WMUX. The WMUX/WMUXb is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WMUX/WMUXbs in slots 7 and 8. The two boards work in active/standby mode. 6.12 WNET/WNETc Board This describes the WNET and WNETc boards. The WNET is shortened from the WCDMA RNC NETwork switch board, and the WNETc is the enhanced version of the WNET. The WNET/WNETc is configured in the WRSS. Each WRSS holds two WNET/WNETc boards in slots 7 and 8. The WNET/WNETc is composed of a main board and a clock sub-board. The main board works in dual-plane mode, and the clock sub-board works in active/standby mode. 6.13 WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes the WOSE/WOSEb board. WOSE: RNC Single mode Optical interface board of E1. WOSEb is the enhanced version of WOSE. The WOSE/WOSEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WOSE/WOSEb boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. 6.14 WOSEc Board This describes the WOSEc board. The WOSEc is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Single mode Optical interface board of E1/T1 (enhanced II). It is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WOSEc boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. 6.15 WSPUb Board This describes the WSPUb board. The WSPUb is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Signaling Processing board (enhanced). It is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WSPUbs in slots 10 and 11. The two boards work in the active/standby mode. 6.16 WDMB Board
6 RNC Boards
This describes the WDMB board. The WDMB is shortened from the Power Distribution Monitor Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each power distribution box holds one WDMB. 6.17 WOPB Board This describes the WOPB board. The WOPB is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each power distribution box holds one WOPB.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-3
6 RNC Boards
6.1 RNC Board Compatibility

This describes the RNC board compatibility. The RNC board compatibility defines whether the RNC boards of different types can be configured in the same subrack at the same time. The WRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS subrack and the WRSS boards can not be configured in WRBS subrack. The WRBS board compatibility the same as WRSS. The RNC board compatibility is categorized into the WRSS board compatibility and the WRBS board compatibility.
WRSS Board Compatibility

All types of WRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS at the same time.
WRBS Board Compatibility

The WRBS boards are of the following two types:
l l
Interface boards: WBIE, WBIEb, WOSE, WOSEb, WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, and WFEE Other boards: WMUX, WMUXb, WFMR, WFMRb, WFMRc, and WSPUb
The WRBS board compatibility mainly discusses the compatibility between the interface boards. The other boards are completely compatible with each other and with all the interface boards. Table 6-1 describes the compatibility between the WRBS interface boards. Table 6-1 Compatibility between WRBS interface boards WBIE WBIE WBIEb WOSE WOSEb WOSEc WFIE WFEE WEIE Y Y N N N Y Y Y WBIEb Y Y N N N Y Y Y WOS E N N Y Y N Y Y Y WOSE b N N Y Y N Y Y Y WOSEc N N N N Y Y Y Y WFIE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y WFE E Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y WEIE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
NOTE
In the above table, Y means the two boards can be configured in the same WRBS at the same time, and N means the two boards cannot be configured in the same WRBS at the same time.
6-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
6.2 WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes the WBIE/WBIEb board. WBIE/WBIEb: WCDMA RNC Interface Board. The WBIE/WBIEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. The WBIE/WBIEb performs the following functions:
l l l l l l l l
Providing 32 E1s/T1s Supporting 32-E1/T1 IMA function, and also supporting UNI mode Supporting ATM over Fractional E1/T1, and Fractional IMA Supporting timeslot cross-connection Providing AAL2 switching function Providing intra-board ATM switching function Providing clock resource for the NodeB Extracting timing signals from the upper-layer devices and exporting them to the clock module through the clock ports which in front panel of the board. The WBIE supports 24 Mbit/s data streams. The WBIEb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
NOTE
l l
Do not configure the WBIE/WBIEb and the WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc in one WRBS.
6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board. The components on the panel of the WBIE/ WBIEb board refer to the LEDs and ports. 6.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb. 6.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes ports on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports for exporting timing signals and four E1/T1 ports. 6.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the following DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12.
6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board. The components on the panel of the WBIE/ WBIEb board refer to the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-1 shows the WBIE/WBIEb panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-5
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-1 WBIE/WBIEb panel
6.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb. Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel. Table 6-2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state.
6-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
LED
Color
Status ON OFF
Meaning There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WBIE/WBIEb, this LED is always on because the WBIE/WBIEb does not work in active/standby mode. None
ALM
Red
OFF ON
ACT
Green
ON
OFF
6.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes ports on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports for exporting timing signals and four E1/T1 ports. Table 6-3 describes the ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel. Table 6-3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel Name E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 CLK1 Function The first group (from the top down) is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 2431. The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/ T1 signals of channels 1623. The third group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 815. The fourth group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 07. This port is used to export timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. This port is used to export timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. Type DB50 DB50 DB50 DB50 SMB, male SMB, male
CLK2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-7
6 RNC Boards
6.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the following DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12. Figure 6-2 shows the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb. Figure 6-2 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb
Table 6-4 describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb. Table 6-4 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON ON ON ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF OFF
S17
1 2 3 4
Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 1623 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 2431
6-8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
58 S16 S15 S5 S6 S10 S11 S13 S14 S7 S8 S9 S12 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8
Reserved Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 47 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 811 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 1215 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 1619 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2023 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2427 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2831 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16 23 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 24 31
NOTE
When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the unbalanced mode. In this case, the TX end is grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to ON. When the 120ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the balanced mode. In this case, the TX end is not grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to OFF. Whether in balanced or unbalanced mode, the RX end is not grounded. The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct. The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 6-4. The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 6-4.
l l l l l
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-9
6 RNC Boards
6.3 WEIE Board

This describes the WEIE board. WEIE: WCDMA RNC WRBS packet over 32-port E1/T1 interface board. The WEIE is an Iub interface board. The WEIE boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. The WEIE performs the following functions:
l l l l l
Providing IP transmission for the Iub interface Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells Providing 32 E1s/T1s for the IP over PPP over E1/T1 Providing clock resource for the NodeB The WEIE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
6.3.1 Panel of the WEIE Board This describes the panel of the WEIE board. The components on the panel of the WEIE refer to the LEDs and ports. 6.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE Board This describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WEIE. 6.3.3 Ports on the WEIE Board This describes ports on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports, and four E1/T1 ports. 6.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board This describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.
6.3.1 Panel of the WEIE Board

This describes the panel of the WEIE board. The components on the panel of the WEIE refer to the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-3 shows the WEIE panel.
6-10
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-3 WEIE panel
6.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE Board

This describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WEIE. Table 6-5 describes the LEDs on the WEIE panel. Table 6-5 LEDs on the WEIE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-11
6 RNC Boards
LED
Color
Status OFF
Meaning There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WEIE, this LED is always on because the WEIE does not work in active/standby mode. None
ALM
Red
OFF ON
ACT
Green
ON
OFF
6.3.3 Ports on the WEIE Board

This describes ports on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports, and four E1/T1 ports. Table 6-6 describes the ports on the WEIE panel. Table 6-6 Ports on the WEIE panel Name E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 CLK1 CLK2 Function The first group (from the top down) is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 2431. The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 1623. Type DB50 DB50
The third group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals DB50 of channels 815. The fourth group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 07. This port is not used in the RNC. This port is not used in the RNC. DB50 SMB, male SMB, male
6.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. Figure 6-4 shows the DIP switches on the WEIE.
6-12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-4 DIP switches on the WEIE
NOTE
With two identical sub-boards, the WEIE has two groups of DIP switches of the same type, for example, two S1s, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Table 6-7 describes the DIP switches on the WEIE. Table 6-7 DIP switches on the WEIE DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
S1
18
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 (1623) Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815 (2431) Indication of impedance
S2
18
ON
OFF
OFF
S3
ON
OFF
ON
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-13
6 RNC Boards
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON
Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable ON
Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
selection switch of E1s/T1s 015 (1631) TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 (1623) TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815 (2431)
S4
18
ON
OFF
OFF
S5
18
ON
OFF
OFF
NOTE
The DIP switches on the lower sub-board control links 015 and the DIP switches on the upper subboard control links 1631. For example, in Figure 6-4, the S4 on the lower sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07, and the S4 on the upper sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 1623. The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1 transport is used. Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable. Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.
l l l l l
6.4 WFEE Board

This describes the WFEE board. WFEE: WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE and 16-port E1/T1 mixed interface board. The WFEE is an Iub interface board. The WFEE boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. The WFEE performs the following functions:
l l l l l
Providing IP transmission for the Iub interface Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells Providing 16 E1s/T1s for the IP over PPP over E1/T1 Providing timing signals for the NodeB through E1/T1 ports The WFEE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
6.4.1 Panel of the WFEE Board This describes the panel of the WFEE board. The components on the panel of the WFEE refer to the LEDs and ports. 6.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE Board
6 RNC Boards
This describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFEE. 6.4.3 Ports on the WFEE Board This describes ports on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1, FE2, FE3, two groups of E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2. 6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board This describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.
6.4.1 Panel of the WFEE Board

This describes the panel of the WFEE board. The components on the panel of the WFEE refer to the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-5 shows the WFEE panel. Figure 6-5 WFEE panel
6.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE Board

This describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFEE. Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the WFEE panel.
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-8 LEDs on the WFEE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WFEE, this LED is always on because the WFEE does not work in active/standby mode. None
OFF
6.4.3 Ports on the WFEE Board

This describes ports on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1, FE2, FE3, two groups of E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 6-9 describes the ports on the WFEE panel. Table 6-9 Ports on the WFEE panel Name FE 0 FE 1 FE 2 FE 3 E1/T1 E1/T1 CLK1 CLK2 Function The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 0. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 1. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 2. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 3. The first group (from the top down) is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 815. The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 07. This port is not used in the RNC. This port is not used in the RNC. Type RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 DB50 DB50 SMB, male SMB, male
6-16
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. Figure 6-6 shows the DIP switches on the WFEE. Figure 6-6 DIP switches on the WFEE
Table 6-10 describes the DIP switches on the WFEE. Table 6-10 DIP switches on the WFEE DIP Swi tch S1 Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
18
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815
S2
18
ON
OFF
OFF
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-17
6 RNC Boards
DIP Swi tch S3
Bit
Description
Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON ON ON ON
Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF ON OFF OFF
Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable ON OFF OFF OFF
1 2
Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 015 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815
S4 S5
18 18
NOTE
l l l l l
The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1 transport is used. Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable. Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.
6.5 WFIE Board

This describes the WFIE board. The WFIE is shortened from WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE interface board. The WFIE is configured in slots 0 and 15 in subrack WRBS as the Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WFIE can also be configured in slots 1 and 14 as the Iur/Iu interface board. The WFIE performs the following functions:
l l l l
Providing IP transmission for the Iub/Iur/Iu interface Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells Supporting the MBMS function of the IuPS interface based on IP transmission The WFIE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE Board This describes the panel of the WFIE board. The components on the panel of the WFIE refer to the LEDs and ports. 6.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE Board This describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFIE. 6.5.3 Ports on the WFIE Board This describes ports on the WFIE board. The WFIE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1, FE2, FE3, CLK1, and CLK2.
6 RNC Boards
6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE Board

This describes the panel of the WFIE board. The components on the panel of the WFIE refer to the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-7 shows the WFIE panel. Figure 6-7 WFIE panel
6.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE Board

This describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFIE. Table 6-11 describes the LEDs on the WFIE panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-19
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-11 LEDs on the WFIE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
6.5.3 Ports on the WFIE Board

This describes ports on the WFIE board. The WFIE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1, FE2, FE3, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 6-12 describes the ports on the WFIE panel. Table 6-12 Ports on the WFIE panel Name FE 0 FE 1 FE 2 FE 3 CLK1 CLK2 Function The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 0. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 1. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 2. The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 3. This port is not used in the RNC. This port is not used in the RNC. Type RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 SMB, male SMB, male
6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board

WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc:(WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board): WFMR, that is, the WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board, has two types: WFMRb and WFMRc. The former type is the enhanced type I, and the latter one is the enhanced type II. The WFMRs/ WFMRbs/WFMRcs are configured in the WRBS subrack. A maximum of ten WFMRs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. And the WFMRs are inserted in slot 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, and 14 in turn; A maximum of eight WFMRbs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. The
6 RNC Boards
WFMRbs are inserted in slot 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 and 13 in turn; A maximum of four WFMRcs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. The WFMRcs are inserted in slot 2, 4, 5, and 13 in turn. The WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc performs the following functions:
l
Multiplexing and demultiplexing

NOTE
The WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc receives data from the NodeBs, demultiplexes the data, and then sends it to the corresponding processing units. It also receives signaling, speech, and packet data in the forward direction, multiplexes it, and then sends it to the NodeB.
l l l l
Processing frame protocols Selecting and distributing cells Performing Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) of the Radio Link Control (RLC) Processing internal communication protocols between the WSPUb and the WFMR/ WFMRb/WFMRc Implementing encryption and decryption Supporting HSUPA The WFMR supports 4 Mbit/s data streams and 16 cells. The WFMRb supports 8 Mbit/s data streams and 39 cells. The WFMRc supports 30 Mbit/s data streams and 90 cells.
l l l l l
6.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board This describes the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are only three LEDs on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. The three LEDs are RUN, ALM, and ACT. 6.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board This describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc.
6.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board

This describes the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are only three LEDs on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. The three LEDs are RUN, ALM, and ACT. Figure 6-8 shows the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-21
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-8 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel
6.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board

This describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. Table 6-13 describes the LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel. Table 6-13 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state.
6-22
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
LED
Color
Status ON OFF
Meaning There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, this LED is always on because the WFMR/ WFMRb/WFMRc does not work in active/standby mode. None
ALM
Red
OFF ON
ACT
Green
ON
OFF
6.7 WFSM Board

This describes the WFSM board. WFSM is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Fan Status Monitoring Unit. It is installed at the rear of the fan drawer. The WFSM performs the following functions:
l
Monitoring the status of each fan in the fan drawer and displaying the operational state by LEDs Communicating with the WMUXb in the WRBS or the WMPU in the WRSS and reporting the operational state of the fan drawer Collecting temperature information using temperature sensors to adjust fan speeds Sending Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals to adjust fan speeds
l l
6.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board This describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board.
6.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board

This describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board. Figure 6-9 shows the DIP switch on the WFSM. Figure 6-9 DIP switch on the WFSM
The DIP switch S1 has four bits. It is used to set the address of the WFSM.
6 RNC Boards
To set the address, pull out the fan drawer as described in the RNC Site Maintenance Guide. Then, set S1 as listed in Table 6-14. Table 6-14 DIP switch on the WFSM DIP Switch S1 Bit 1, the least significant bit 2 3 4, the most significant bit Status ON OFF ON ON Meaning 0 1 0 0
CAUTION
In the RNC, the DIP switch on the WFSM must be set as listed in Table 6-14.
6.8 WHPU Board

This describes the WHPU board. The WHPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC High speed Packet processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The N:1 (N < 5) resource pool mode is adopted, and thus the WRSS can hold up to five WHPUs in slots 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 according to the actual traffic volume. The WHPU performs the following functions:
l l l l l
Managing GTP-U tunnel resource, establishing and releasing tunnel connections Forwarding GTP-U messages Managing GTP-U paths Supporting Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS) The WHPU supports 240 Mbit/s data streams.
6.8.1 Panel of the WHPU Board This describes the panel of the WHPU board. There are only LEDs on the panel of the WHPU. 6.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU Board This describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WHPU. 6.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board This describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board.
6.8.1 Panel of the WHPU Board

This describes the panel of the WHPU board. There are only LEDs on the panel of the WHPU. Figure 6-10 shows the WHPU panel.
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-10 WHPU panel
6.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU Board

This describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WHPU. Table 6-15 describes the LEDs on the WHPU panel. Table 6-15 LEDs on the WHPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON for 2 s and OFF for 2s
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Meaning The board is active and functional.
The board is standby and functional.
6-25
6 RNC Boards
LED
Color
Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 5s ON OFF
Meaning The board is idle. This may occur only when the number of the active WHPUs that is configured on the LMT is smaller than the actual number minus 1. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
ALM
Red
OFF ON or flashing
6.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board

This describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board. Figure 6-11 shows the DIP switch on the WHPU. Figure 6-11 DIP switch on the WHPU
Table 6-16 describes the DIP switch on the WHPU.
6-26
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-16 DIP switch on the WHPU DIP Switc h S2 Bit Status Meaning Description
ON (default) OFF
The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled.
Operational status selection bit
ON (default) OFF
Operation mode selection bit
ON OFF (default)
In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit
ON (default) OFF
6.9 WLPU Board

This describes the WLPU board. The WLPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Line Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS can hold up to six WLPUs in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9 according to the actual traffic volume. The WLPU is an Iu/Iur/Iub interface board and is used to connect the WRBS with the WRSS. The WLPU is composed of a main board and an optical sub-board. The WLPU performs the following functions:
l
Providing 16 STM-1/OC-3c optical ports under full configuration, that is, when four W4ASb/W4ASc optical sub-boards are configured. Alternatively, providing four STM-4 optical ports under full configuration, that is, when four W1TSb optical sub-boards are configured. Supporting ATM over SDH, and supporting MSP 1+1 optical port backup Monitoring the quality of synchronization clock in real time, and reporting it to the WMPU
l l
6.9.1 Panels of the WLPU Board This describes panels of the WLPU board. The following components are on the panel of the WLPU: the LEDs and ports. 6.9.2 LED on the WLPU Board This describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board. 6.9.3 Ports on the WLPU Board The WLPU supports multiple types of sub-board configurations, providing three transmission modes of optical interfaces: STM-1 (SDH), STM-4 (SDH), and OC-3c (SONET).
6 RNC Boards
6.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board The WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch. 6.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU Boards The WLPU board supports three types of optical sub-board: W4ASb, W4ASc, and W1TSb. The specifications for the optical ports cover optical cable mode, connector type, transport mode, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
6.9.1 Panels of the WLPU Board

This describes panels of the WLPU board. The following components are on the panel of the WLPU: the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-12 shows the WLPU panels. Figure 6-12 WLPU panels
(1) WLPU panel when four W4ASb/W4ASc optical sub-boards are configured
(2) WLPU panel when four W1TSb optical sub-boards are configured
6.9.2 LED on the WLPU Board

This describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board. Table 6-17 describes the LED on the WLPU panel.
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-17 LED on the WLPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
6.9.3 Ports on the WLPU Board

The WLPU supports multiple types of sub-board configurations, providing three transmission modes of optical interfaces: STM-1 (SDH), STM-4 (SDH), and OC-3c (SONET). Table 6-18 describes the ports on the WLPU panel. Table 6-18 Ports on the WLPU panel Optical SubBoard W4ASb W4ASc Transmissio n Mode STM-1 (SDH) STM-1 (SDH)/OC-3c (SONET) STM-4 (SDH) Rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s Mod e Single mode Single mode Single mode Logical Port Number 0-15, from the top down 0-15, from the top down 0, 4, 8, and 12, from the top down Type LC/PC LC/PC
W1TSb
622 Mbit/s
SC/PC
6.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board

The WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch. Figure 6-13 shows the DIP switch on the WLPU.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-29
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the WLPU
Table 6-19 describes the DIP switch on the WLPU. Table 6-19 DIP switch on the WLPU Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF 3 ON OFF (default) 4 ON (default) OFF The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled. Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit Operation mode selection bit Description Operational status selection bit
6-30
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
6.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU Boards

The WLPU board supports three types of optical sub-board: W4ASb, W4ASc, and W1TSb. The specifications for the optical ports cover optical cable mode, connector type, transport mode, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. Table 6-20 describes the specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards. Table 6-20 Specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transport mode Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength W4ASb Single-mode LC/PC STM-1 < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 31.0 dBm 8.0 dBm 1,310 nm W4ASc Single-mode LC/PC STM-1/OC-3c < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 31.0 dBm 8.0 dBm 1,310 nm W1TSb Single-mode SC/PC STM-4 < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 29.0 dBm 7.0 dBm 1,310 nm
6.10 WMPU Board

This describes the WMPU board. The WMPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC switch module Main Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS holds two WMPUs in slots 0 and 1. The two boards work in the active/standby mode. The WMPU performs the following functions:
l l l
Allocating resources in the WRSS Managing and monitoring other boards in the WRSS Providing operation and maintenance channels between the BAM and the WRBS
6.10.1 Panel of the WMPU Board This describes the panel of the WMPU. The following components are on the panel of the WMPU: the LEDs, buttons, and ports. 6.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU Board This describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMPU. 6.10.3 Ports on the WMPU Board The WMPU provides three ports: ETH, CON, and AUX. 6.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board
6 RNC Boards
The WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch.
6.10.1 Panel of the WMPU Board

This describes the panel of the WMPU. The following components are on the panel of the WMPU: the LEDs, buttons, and ports. Figure 6-14 shows the WMPU panel. Figure 6-14 WMPU panel
The RESET button is used to reset the board.

NOTE
In addition, you can reset the board by running the RST BRD command.
6-32
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
CAUTION
Resetting a board interrupts the existing services on the board. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
6.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU Board

This describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMPU. Table 6-21 describes the LEDs on the WMPU panel. Table 6-21 LEDs on the WMPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
6.10.3 Ports on the WMPU Board

The WMPU provides three ports: ETH, CON, and AUX. Table 6-22 describes the ports on the WMPU panel. Table 6-22 Ports on the WMPU panel Name ETH CON AUX Function Ethernet port, used for the communication between the WMPU and the BAM server Debugging serial port, used to connect the console Remote Modem serial port, used for remote maintenance Type RJ45 DB9, male DB9, male
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-33
6 RNC Boards
6.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board

The WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch. Figure 6-15 shows the DIP switch on the WMPU. Figure 6-15 DIP switch on the WMPU
Table 6-23 describes the DIP switch on the WMPU. Table 6-23 DIP switch on the WMPU Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF 3 ON OFF (default)
6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit
Description Operational status selection bit
In the RNC, it is always set to OFF.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Bit 4
Status ON (default) OFF
Meaning The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled.
Description Watchdog function selection bit
6.11 WMUX/WMUXb Board

This describes the WMUX and WMUXb boards. The WMUX is shortened from the WCDMA RNC system MUltipleXing board, and the WMUXb is the enhanced version of the WMUX. The WMUX/WMUXb is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WMUX/WMUXbs in slots 7 and 8. The two boards work in active/standby mode. The WMUX/WMUXb is composed of a main board and an optical sub-board. The WMUX/ WMUXb performs the following functions:
l l l l l l
Performing ATM cell switching Providing synchronization clock for the boards in the WRBS Managing and monitoring all boards in the WRBS Processing alarms concerning the power supply and the fan The WMUX supports 40 Mbit/s data streams. The WMUXb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
6.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb Board This describes the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb board. The following components are on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb: the LEDs, buttons, and ports. 6.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb. 6.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb Board The WMUX/WMUXb provides the following ports: TX, RX, ETH, 1PPS, COM1, and COM2. 6.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb Boards The specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
6.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb Board

This describes the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb board. The following components are on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb: the LEDs, buttons, and ports. Figure 6-16 shows the WMUX/WMUXb panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-35
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-16 WMUX/WMUXb panel
The RESET button is used to reset the board.

NOTE
In addition, you can reset the board by running the RST BRD command.
CAUTION
Resetting a board interrupts the existing services on the board. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
6.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb. Table 6-24 describes the LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel.
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-24 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
6.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb Board

The WMUX/WMUXb provides the following ports: TX, RX, ETH, 1PPS, COM1, and COM2. Table 6-25 describes the ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel. Table 6-25 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel Name TX RX ETH 1PPS COM1 Function TX is the transmitting optical port and RX is the receiving optical port. The two types of ports are used to communicate with the WLPU in the WRSS. Ethernet port used to test the board. It is disconnected when the board is working. PPS signal receiving port, used to receive PPS signals from the GRU suite Communication serial port, used to exchange management and maintenance information between the WMUXb and the GRU suite Communication serial port, reserved Type Single-mode 155 Mbit/s STM-1/ OC-3c SC/PC RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
COM2
RJ45
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-37
6 RNC Boards
6.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb Boards

The specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. Table 6-26 describes the specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards. Table 6-26 Specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength Specification Single-mode SC/PC < 30 km 14.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 34.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 1,310 nm
6.12 WNET/WNETc Board

This describes the WNET and WNETc boards. The WNET is shortened from the WCDMA RNC NETwork switch board, and the WNETc is the enhanced version of the WNET. The WNET/WNETc is configured in the WRSS. Each WRSS holds two WNET/WNETc boards in slots 7 and 8. The WNET/WNETc is composed of a main board and a clock sub-board. The main board works in dual-plane mode, and the clock sub-board works in active/standby mode. Accordingly, the WNET/WNETc has two functional parts: switching network part and clock part. The functions of the switching network part of the WNET/WNETc are as follows:
l
Performing fast switching of fixed-length packets on 40 x 40 ports with a total switching capacity of 25 Gbit/s Providing 40 ports with the maximum rate on each port being 622 Mbit/s (full duplex) Providing system diagnosis, reporting the status of the switching network in real time, and helping the system detect and trace errors
l l
The functions of the clock part of the WNET/WNETc are as follows:

l
Extracting timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the synchronization line signals, processing the timing signals, and providing them for the entire system Providing two 2 Mbit/s input ports (CLK IN2, CLK IN3) Providing two 2 MHz input ports, which share two physical ports with 2 Mbit/s input ports (CLK IN2, CLK IN3)
l l
6-38

l
6 RNC Boards
Providing one 8 kHz input port, which shares the physical port CLK IN2 with 2 Mbit/s input port Providing two satellite clock synchronization input ports (CLK IN0, CLK IN1), each including the differential 1PPS signal Providing line clock extraction and timing signal output
6.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc Board There are the following components on the panel of the WNET/WNETc: the LEDs and ports. 6.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board There are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc. 6.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc Board The WNET/WNETc provides the following ports: CLK IN0, CLK IN1, CLK OUT0, CLK OUT1, CLK IN2, and CLK IN3. 6.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board There is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switch S2 on its clock sub-board.
6.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc Board

There are the following components on the panel of the WNET/WNETc: the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-17 shows the WNET/WNETc panel. Figure 6-17 WNET/WNETc panel
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-39
6 RNC Boards
6.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board

There are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc. Table 6-27 describes the LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel. Table 6-27 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF CLK Green ON for 0.25 s and OFF for 0.25 s ON for 3 s and OFF for 1s ON for 1 s and OFF for 3s ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF ACT Green ON OFF The clock sub-board on this board is active. The clock sub-board on this board is standby. Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The clock is in fast pull-in status. The clock is in locked status. The clock is in hold status. The clock is in free-run status. There is a fault alarm.
6.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc Board

The WNET/WNETc provides the following ports: CLK IN0, CLK IN1, CLK OUT0, CLK OUT1, CLK IN2, and CLK IN3. Table 6-28 describes the ports on the WNET/WNETc panel. Table 6-28 Ports on the WNET/WNETc panel Name CLK IN0 Function Connected to the GRU suite and used to input timing signals Type RJ45
6-40
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Name CLK IN1 CLK OUT0 CLK OUT1 CLK IN2 CLK IN3
Function Optional, connected to the GRU suite and used to input timing signals This port is not used in the RNC. This port is not used in the RNC. Clock input port 2, used to input 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz and 8 kHz timing signals Clock input port 3, used to input 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz timing signals
Type RJ45 RJ45 SMB, male SMB, male SMB, male
6.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board

There is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switch S2 on its clock sub-board. Figure 6-18 shows the DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc. Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc
Table 6-29 describes the DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-41
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-29 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF 3 ON OFF (default) 4 ON (default) OFF The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled. Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit Operation mode selection bit Description Operational status selection bit
6.13 WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes the WOSE/WOSEb board. WOSE: RNC Single mode Optical interface board of E1. WOSEb is the enhanced version of WOSE. The WOSE/WOSEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WOSE/WOSEb boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. WOSE/WOSEb performs the following functions:
l l l
Supporting ATM over E1 over SDH bearer mode, providing 63 E1s Providing eight E1 ports that support Fractional ATM and CES functions Providing IMA function, supporting IMA/UNI mode, and supporting up to 32 IMA groups and UNI links in total Providing intra-board ATM switching function Providing clock resource for the NodeB Receiving timing signals from the upper level equipment and sending them to the clock module The WOSE supports 24 Mbit/s data streams. The WOSEb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
l l l
l l
CAUTION
l l
The WOSE/WOSEb and the WBIE/WBIEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS. The WOSE/WOSEb and the WOSEc cannot be configured in the same WRBS.
6-42
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
6 RNC Boards
l l
The optical port on the WOSE/WOSEb does not support the fractional ATM function. The electrical port on the WOSE/WOSEb does not support the timeslot cross-connection function.
6.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb board. The following components are located on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb: the LEDs and ports. 6.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb. 6.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes the ports on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following ports: OPT, E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2. 6.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9. 6.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb Boards The specifications for optical ports on WOSE/WOSEb boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
6.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb board. The following components are located on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb: the LEDs and ports.
WOSE Panel
Figure 6-19 shows the WOSE panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-43
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-19 WOSE panel
WOSEb Panel
Figure 6-20 shows the WOSEb panel.
6-44
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-20 WOSEb panel
6.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb. Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb panel. Table 6-30 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
6-45
6 RNC Boards
LED ACT
Color Green
Status ON
Meaning In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is active. In other modes, it indicates nothing. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is standby. In other modes, it indicates nothing.
OFF
6.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes the ports on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following ports: OPT, E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 6-31 describes the ports on WOSE/WOSEb panel. Table 6-31 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb panel Name OPT Function Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals Type Single-mode 155 Mbit/s MTRJ for the WOSE Single-mode 155 Mbit/s LC/PC for the WOSEb E1/T1 CLK1 E1 port, used to transmit and receive E1 signals This port is used to output timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. This port is used to output timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. DB50 SMB, male
CLK2
SMB, male
6.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9. Figure 6-21 shows the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb.
6-46
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-21 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb
Table 6-32 describes the settings and meanings of DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb. Table 6-32 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
S3
14
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 47 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 47
S4
14
OFF
OFF
S5
14
ON
OFF
S6
14
OFF
OFF
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-47
6 RNC Boards
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON OFF ON ON
Setting for 120ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF ON
S7 S8 S9
18 18 1 2
TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 RX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07
NOTE
l l l l
The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct. The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 6-32. The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 6-32.
6.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb Boards

The specifications for optical ports on WOSE/WOSEb boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. Table 6-33 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards. Table 6-33 Specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength Specification Single-mode MTRJ < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 31.0 dBm 8.0 dBm 1,300 nm
Table 6-34 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards.
6-48
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-34 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength Specification Single-mode LC/PC < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 31.0 dBm 8.0 dBm 1,310 nm
6.14 WOSEc Board

This describes the WOSEc board. The WOSEc is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Single mode Optical interface board of E1/T1 (enhanced II). It is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The WOSEc boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS. The WOSEc performs the following functions:
l l l
Supporting ATM over E1 over SDH bearer mode, providing 63 E1s Providing eight E1 ports that support Fractional ATM and CES functions Providing IMA function, supporting IMA/UNI mode, and supporting up to 63 IMA groups and UNI links in total Providing intra-board ATM switching function Providing clock resource for the NodeB Receiving timing signals from the upper level equipment and sending them to the clock module The WOSEc supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.
l l l
CAUTION
l l
The WOSEc and the WBIE/WBIEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS. The WOSEc and the WOSE/WOSEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS.
NOTE
l l
The optical port on the WOSEc does not support the fractional ATM function. The electrical port on the WOSEc does not support the timeslot cross-connection function.
6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc Board There are the following components on the panel of the WOSEc: the LEDs and ports. 6.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc Board
6 RNC Boards
There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc. 6.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc Board The WOSEc provides the following ports: OPT, E1, CLK1, and CLK2. 6.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board The WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11. 6.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc Boards The specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.
6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc Board

There are the following components on the panel of the WOSEc: the LEDs and ports. Figure 6-22 shows the WOSEc panel. Figure 6-22 WOSEc panel
6.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc. Table 6-35 describes the LEDs on the WOSEc panel.
6 RNC Boards
Table 6-35 LEDs on the WOSEc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s Meaning The board is in normal operation.
ON for 0.125 s and The board is in loading state. OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is active. In other modes, it indicates nothing. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is standby. In other modes, it indicates nothing.
6.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc Board

The WOSEc provides the following ports: OPT, E1, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 6-36 describes the ports on the WOSEc panel. Table 6-36 Ports on the WOSEc panel Name OPT E1/T1 CLK1 Function Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals E1 port, used to transmit and receive E1 signals This port is used to output timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. This port is used to output timing signals that are received from the upper level equipment as a system clock source. Type 155 Mbit/s LC/PC DB50 SMB, male
CLK2
SMB, male
6.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board

The WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11. Figure 6-23 shows the DIP switches on the WOSEc.
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-23 DIP switches on the WOSEc
Table 6-37 describes the switches on the WOSEc. Table 6-37 DIP switches on the WOSEc DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S11
14 14 14 14 18 18 1 2
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 47 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 47 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 RX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07
6-52
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
6 RNC Boards
l l l l
6.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc Boards

The specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards cover optical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength. Table 6-38 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards. Table 6-38 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards Item Optical cable mode Connector type Transmission distance Output optical power Receiver sensitivity Saturation Center wavelength Specification Single-mode LC/PC < 15 km 15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm 31.0 dBm 8.0 dBm 1,310 nm
6.15 WSPUb Board

This describes the WSPUb board. The WSPUb is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Signaling Processing board (enhanced). It is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WSPUbs in slots 10 and 11. The two boards work in the active/standby mode. The WSPUb performs the following functions:
l
Processing high-layer signaling of the Uu/Iu/Iur/Iub interface, such as the RRC signaling of the Uu interface, the RANAP signaling of the Iu interface, the RNSAP signaling of the Iur interface, and the NBAP signaling of the Iub interface Allocating and managing various resources, such as PVC, AAL2, AAL2 Path, GTP-U, PDCP, IUUP, RLC, MACD, MDC, and FP, which are necessary for service setup, and establishing signaling and service connections The WSPUb is of 75,000 Busy Hour Call Attempt (BHCA) processing capability, and supports 100 NodeBs and 300 cells.
6.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb Board There are only LEDs on the panel of the WSPUb. 6.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb Board
6 RNC Boards
There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb.
6.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb Board

There are only LEDs on the panel of the WSPUb. Figure 6-24 shows the WSPUb panel. Figure 6-24 WSPUb panel
6.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb. Table 6-39 describes the LEDs on the WSPUb panel. Table 6-39 LEDs on the WSPUb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-54
6 RNC Boards
LED
Color
Status OFF
Meaning There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
ALM
Red
OFF ON
ACT
Green
ON OFF
6.16 WDMB Board

This describes the WDMB board. The WDMB is shortened from the Power Distribution Monitor Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each power distribution box holds one WDMB. The WDMB performs the following functions:
l l l l l l
Detecting two channels of 48 V input power voltages Detecting two lightning protection circuits Detecting six power distribution output switches Detecting analog signals of external environment Providing audible and visible alarms Communicating with the WMUXb, reporting the status of the power distribution box, and exchanging OM information
6.16.1 Panel of the WDMB Board There are the following components on the panel of the WDMB: the LEDs and the switch. 6.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB Board There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB. 6.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board The WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.
6.16.1 Panel of the WDMB Board

There are the following components on the panel of the WDMB: the LEDs and the switch. Figure 6-25 shows the WDMB panel.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6-55
6 RNC Boards
Figure 6-25 WDMB panel
You can use the alarm sound switch to set the power distribution box to emit sound or not:
l l
If you set the switch to ON, the power distribution box emits sound when it is faulty. If you set the switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not emit sound when it is faulty.
6.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB Board

There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB. Table 6-40 describes the LEDs on the WDMB panel. Table 6-40 LEDs on the WDMB panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s OFF Meaning The WDMB works properly and communicates with the WMUXb properly. The WDMB is not working or it does not communicate with the WMUXb properly. The power supply for the WDMB is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm concerning the power distribution box. The power distribution box is faulty. However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALM LED is always ON. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
ALM
Red
OFF ON
6-56
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
6 RNC Boards
6.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board

The WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch. Figure 6-26 shows the DIP switch on the WDMB. Figure 6-26 DIP switch on the WDMB
With four bits, the DIP switch S2 is used to set the address of the WDMB. To set the address, pull out the WDMB as described in the Replacing an RNC Power Distribution Box. Then, set S2 as listed in Table 6-41. Table 6-41 DIP switch on the WDMB DIP Switch S2 Bit 1, the most significant bit 2 3 4, the least significant bit Status ON ON ON ON Meaning "0" "0" "0" "0"
CAUTION
In the RNC, the DIP switch on the WDMB must be set as listed in Table 6-41.
6.17 WOPB Board

This describes the WOPB board. The WOPB is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each power distribution box holds one WOPB. The WOPB performs the following functions:
l l
Suppressing differential-mode surge voltage Suppressing common-mode surge voltage

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
7
About This Chapter
NOTE
RNC Cables
This part describes all the cables used inside and outside the RNC cabinet.
l l
For detailed methods for installing these cables, refer to the RNC Installation Guide. The type of the optical cables that are actually used depends on the type of the interface boards in the RNC and the type of the interface of the peer equipment.
7.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial Cable This describes the RNC 75-ohm coaxial cable. The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cables. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1 trunk signals. 7.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable This describes the RNC 120-ohm twisted pair cable. The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1/T1 trunk signals. 7.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU to the ODF or another NE and connects the WOSEb/WOSEc to the ODF or another NE. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable can also connect the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. 7.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSS to the ODF or another NE. 7.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR to the ODF or another NE, or connects the WOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS to the ODF or another NE. 7.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable
7 RNC Cables
This describes the RNC LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The function and installation of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable in the BSC6800 is the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable as described in this section. 7.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the WMUXb in the WRBR subrack, the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the ODF or another NE, the WOSEc in the WRBS subrack to the ODF or another NE, or the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. The RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is also used to connect the S3528G LAN switch and the S3928P-EI LAN switch. 7.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. 7.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSS to the ODF or another NE, or interconnects the S3528G LAN switches, or connects the S3528G LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. 7.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNC are the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. 7.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable interconnects the LAN switches, or connects the LAN switches to the ODF or another NE. 7.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-LC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. It is used to interconnect LAN switches S3928P-EI and connect the LAN switch S3928P-EI to the ODF or another NE. 7.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of the optical cables. It is optional. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is used for connecting the GE ports on the S3528G LAN Switch and the S3928P-EI LAN switch when they are in a active/standby relationship. 7.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable interconnects the LAN switches or connects the LAN switch to the ODF, or another NE.
7 RNC Cables
7.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable This describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. 7.16 RNC Crossover Cable This describes the RNC crossover cable. The crossover cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It is mandatory. The number of the crossover cables to be configured is decided by the site requirements. The crossover cable interconnects the LAN switches. 7.17 RNC Straight-Through Cable This describes the RNC straight-through cable. The straight-through cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It is mandatory. The number of the straight-through cables to be configured is decided by the site requirements. 7.18 RNC Clock Signal Cable This describes the signal cable of the RNC clock. The clock cable is a type of signal cables. It is optional. The clock cables are of two types. One type is used to send the timing signals to the WNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the WBIEb or the WOSEc in the WRBS is the Iu interface board. The other type is used to send the timing signals from the BITS clock source to the WNET/ WNETc in the WRSS when the RNC uses the BITS clock source. 7.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal Cable This describes the signal cable of the RNC alarm box. The signal cable of the alarm box is a type of signal cables. It is optional. The alarm box signal cable is used to send alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visible display. 7.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXb This describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. The signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb is the straight-through cable. Each GRU suite is configured with two signal cables. It is optional. It transmits the positioning information and PPS signals from the GRU suite to the WMUX/WMUXb and the GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. 7.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETc This describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. The signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc is the straight-through cable. It is optional. It transmits the synchronization timing signals from the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc and the GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. 7.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power Distribution Box This describes the monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box. The monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is a type of signal cables. It is mandatory. The monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is used to transmit monitoring signals from the power distribution box to the WRBS. 7.23 RNC Power Cable This describes the RNC power cable. The RNC power cables include the 48V power cables and the GND power cables. They are mandatory. Each cabinet must be configured with four power cables, two of which are 48V power cables and two of which are GND power cables. The power cables connect the PDF and the RNC cabinets. 7.24 RNC PGND Cable
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-3
7 RNC Cables
This describes the RNC PGND cable. The PGND cable is mandatory. Each RNC is configured with one PGND cable. When RNC cabinets are combined, three PGND cables are added to connect two neighboring cabinets.
7-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
7.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial Cable

This describes the RNC 75-ohm coaxial cable. The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cables. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1 trunk signals. The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the RNC has a structure of 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Appearance
Figure 7-1 shows a 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-5
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-1 75-ohm coaxial cable
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is DB50 connector, and the other end has no connector. You have to make it on site.
NOTE
DB50 connectors are divided into straight connectors and bend connectors. The relationship between the straight connectors and the signals of trunk cables is the same as that between the bend connectors and the signals of truck cables. The installation positions of the two types of connectors are the same.
7-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-1 describes the relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50 connectors. Table 7-1 Relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50 connectors DB50 Pin 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15 17 18 20 21 23 24 27 28 30 31 33 34 36 37 39 40
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Signal Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Micro Coaxial Cable No. W2.8
Label CHAN7 TX
Channel No. CHAN 7
W2.7
CHAN7 RX
W2.6
CHAN6 TX
CHAN 6
W2.5
CHAN6 RX
W2.4
CHAN5 TX
CHAN 5
W2.3
CHAN5 RX
W2.2
CHAN4 TX
CHAN 4
W2.1
CHAN4 RX
W1.8
CHAN3 TX
CHAN 3
W1.7
CHAN3 RX
W1.6
CHAN2 TX
CHAN 2
W1.5
CHAN2 RX
W1.4
CHAN1 TX
CHAN 1
7-7
7 RNC Cables
DB50 Pin 42 43 45 46 48 49
Signal Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Micro Coaxial Cable No. W1.3
Label CHAN1 RX
Channel No.
W1.2
CHAN0 TX
CHAN 0
W1.1
CHAN0 RX
Table 7-2 describes the signals listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-2 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable Signal Ring Tip Bearer Shielding layer of coaxial cables Core of coaxial cables
Installation
The DB50 connector of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS. The other end is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE, such as the CN, the NodeB, another RNC or GSM equipments (BSC) through transmission equipment. The other end can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions of the 75-ohm coaxial cables, refer to line 91 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 29 and 30 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables.
7.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

This describes the RNC 120-ohm twisted pair cable. The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1/T1 trunk signals. The 120-ohm twisted pair cable used by the RNC has two types: 0.4 mm and 0.5 mm (core diameter). The core diameter that the DDF supports determines the type of the 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be used. By default, the 120-ohm twisted pair cable of 0.5mm core diameter is used.
Appearance
Figure 7-2 shows a 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-2 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-9
7 RNC Cables
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is DB50 connector, and the other end has no connector. You have to make it on site.
NOTE
DB50 connectors are divided into straight connectors and bend connectors. The relationship between the straight connectors and the signals of trunk cables is the same as that between the bend connectors and the signals of trunk cables. The installation positions of the two types of connectors are the same.
Pin Assignment
Table 7-3 describes the relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors. Table 7-3 Relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors DB50 Pin 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15 17 18 20 21 23 24 27 28 30 31 33 34
7-10
Signal TxTip7 TxRing7 RxTip7 RxRing7 TxTip6 TxRing6 RxTip6 RxRing6 TxTip5 TxRing5 RxTip5 RxRing5 TxTip4 TxRing4 RxTip4 RxRing4 TxTip3 TxRing3 RxTip3 RxRing3 TxTip2 TxRing2
Label CHAN 7 TX
Color Red Green
Channel No. CHAN 7
CHAN 7 RX
Red Orange
CHAN 6 TX
Red Blue
CHAN 6
CHAN 6 RX
White Grey
CHAN 5 TX
White Orange
CHAN 5
CHAN 5 RX
White Green
CHAN 4 TX
White Orange
CHAN 4
CHAN 4 RX
White Blue
CHAN 3 TX
Red Green
CHAN 3
CHAN 3 RX
Red Orange
CHAN 2 TX
Red Blue
CHAN 2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
DB50 Pin 36 37 39 40 42 43 45 46 48 49
Signal RxTip2 RxRing2 TxTip1 TxRing1 RxTip1 RxRing1 TxTip0 TxRing0 RxTip0 RxRing0
Label CHAN 2 RX
Color White Grey
Channel No.
CHAN 1 TX
White Orange
CHAN 1
CHAN 1 RX
White Green
CHAN 0 TX
White Orange
CHAN 0
CHAN 0 RX
White Blue
Table 7-4 describes the signals listed in Table 7-3. Table 7-4 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable Signal Ring Tip Bearer The other core of a twisted pair cable The other core of a twisted pair cable
Installation
The DB50 connector of the 120-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/ WFEE in the WRBS. The other end is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE, such as the CN, the NodeB, another RNC or GSM equipments (BSC) through transmission equipment. The other end can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions of the 120-ohm coaxial cables, refer to line 91 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 29 and 30 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables.
7.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU to the ODF or another NE and connects the WOSEb/WOSEc to the ODF or another NE. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable can also connect the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-11
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
Figure 7-3 shows an MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-3 MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The MTRJ optical connector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connects the WLPU and the ODF/another NE, refer to line 3 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
For the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure that the IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WLPU panel, and the OUT end connects to the RX optical port on the WLPU panel. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.
Installation of the MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WOSEb/ WOSEc and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS. The MTRJ optical connector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connects the WOSEb/WOSEc and the ODF/another NE, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables (1).
7-12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
CAUTION
For the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure that the IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel, and the OUT end connects to the RX optical port on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel. Otherwise, the WOSEb/WOSEc cannot communicate with the NE.
Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between LAN Switches and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch. The MTRJ optical connector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connects the LAN switch and the ODF or another NE, refer to lines 4 to 7 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
For the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure that the IN end connects to the TX optical port on the LAN switch, and the OUT end connects to the RX optical port on the LAN switch. Otherwise, the LAN switch cannot communicate with the NE.
7.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSS to the ODF or another NE.
Appearance
Figure 7-4 shows an MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-4 MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-13
7 RNC Cables
Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
The SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The MTRJ optical connector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable which connects the WLPU and the ODF/another NE, refer to line 3 in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
For the SC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure that the IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WLPU panel, and the OUT end connects to the RX optical port on the WLPU panel. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with other NEs through the ODF or other transmission devices.
7.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR to the ODF or another NE, or connects the WOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS to the ODF or another NE.
NOTE
A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.
Appearance
Figure 7-5 shows a 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-5 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WOSEc and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The FC/PC optical connector is connected to:

l
7 RNC Cables
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, and RNC through transmission equipment Or another NE directly
For the installation positions of the optical cables, see lines 27 and 28 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel and the FC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEb/WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF and other transmission equipment. s
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The FC/PC optical connector is connected to:
l
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment Or another NE directly
For the installation position of the optical cable, see line in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the RX end connects to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end connects to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.
7.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The function and installation of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable in the BSC6800 is the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable as described in this section.
7 RNC Cables
NOTE
Before using a pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC singlemode optical cable, attach temporary labels 1 to the two ends of one LC/PC-FC/PC single mode optical cable, and attach temporary labels 2 to the two ends of the other LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable.
Appearance
Figure 7-6 shows an LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-6 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WOSEc and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The FC/PC optical connector is connected to:
l
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, and RNC through transmission equipment Or another NE directly
For the installation positions of the optical cables, see lines 27 and 28 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel and the FC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEb/WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF and other transmission equipment. s
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The FC/PC optical connector is connected to:
l
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment
7-16

l
7 RNC Cables
Or another NE directly
For the installation position of the optical cable, see line in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
7.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the WMUXb in the WRBR subrack, the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the ODF or another NE, the WOSEc in the WRBS subrack to the ODF or another NE, or the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. The RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is also used to connect the S3528G LAN switch and the S3928P-EI LAN switch.
NOTE
A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.
Appearance
Figure 7-7 shows a 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-7 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable That Connects the WLPU with the WMUXb
Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPU with the WMUXb. The LC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable are connected to the WMUXb in the WRBS.
7 RNC Cables
For the installation positions, refer to lines 83, 84, and in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the optical ports on the WLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX and RX optical cables on the WMUXb panel. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the WMUXb.
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable That Connects the WLPU with the ODF/Another NE
Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPU with the ODF/another NE. If the optical sub-board on the WLPU is the W4ASb or the W4ASc, the LC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions, refer to line in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on the WLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/ another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable that connects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE
Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE. The LC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The SC/PC optical connectors are connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through
7 RNC Cables
transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Figure 3-6.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX and RX optical ports on the WOSEc panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch Connection
The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is used when the S3528G LAN switch is configured with the GBIC-LX-SM1310-A optical module and when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with the SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. The SC/PC optical connector of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.
NOTE
Before using a pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable, attach temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable, and attach temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-19
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
Figure 7-8 shows an LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-8 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable That Connects the WLPU with the WMUXb
Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPU with the WMUXb. The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WMUXb in the WRBS. For the installation positions, refer to lines 83, 84, and in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the optical ports on the WLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX and RX optical cables on the WMUXb panel. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the WMUXb.
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable That Connects the WLPU with the ODF/Another NE
Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPU with the ODF/another NE. If the optical sub-board on the WLPU is the W4ASb or the W4ASc, the LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions, refer to line in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
7 RNC Cables
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on the WLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/ another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable that connects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE
Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE. The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The SC/PC optical connectors are connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NE directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Figure 3-6.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX and RX optical ports on the WOSEc panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch Connection
The SC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-21
7 RNC Cables
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSS to the ODF or another NE, or interconnects the S3528G LAN switches, or connects the S3528G LAN switch to the ODF or another NE.
NOTE
A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.
Appearance
Figure 7-9 shows a 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-9 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
One SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The other is connected to:
l
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as a NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment Or another NE directly
For the installation position of the optical cable between the WLPU and the ODF or another NE, see line in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
7-22
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
CAUTION
Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch (S3528G) Connection
The SC/PC optical connectors of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single mode optical cable are connected to the S3528G LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.
One SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actual installation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528G LAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/ another NE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or other transmission equipment.
7.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC singlemode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNC are the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-23
7 RNC Cables
NOTE
Before using a pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one SC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable, and put on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.
Appearance
Figure 7-10 shows an SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-10 SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU and ODF or Another NE
One SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The other is connected to:
l
The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as a NodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment Or another NE directly
For the installation position of the optical cable between the WLPU and the ODF or another NE, see line in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch (S3528G) Connection
The SC/PC optical connectors of the SC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable are connected to the S3528G LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7-24
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.
One SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC singlemode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actual installation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528G LAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/another NE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or other transmission equipment.
7.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable interconnects the LAN switches, or connects the LAN switches to the ODF or another NE.
NOTE
Before using a pair of LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical cable, and put on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable.
Appearance
Figure 7-11 shows the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. Figure 7-11 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch Connection
The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with a SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical cable are connected to the LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
7 RNC Cables
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the LC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch with the ODF/Another NE.
The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with a SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. One LC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch. And the other LC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The LC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on the LAN switch and the LC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/ another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
7.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-LC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. It is used to interconnect LAN switches S3928P-EI and connect the LAN switch S3928P-EI to the ODF or another NE.
NOTE
Before assembling two LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cables to a pair, attach temporary labels 1 to both ends of one LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable, and attach temporary labels 2 to both ends of the other LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cables to a pair of LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cables.
Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable.
7-26
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-12 LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch with the ODF/Another NE.
The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with a SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. One LC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch, and the other LC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The LC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on the LAN switch and the LC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/ another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch Connection
The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with a SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connected to the LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the LC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-27
7 RNC Cables
7.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of the optical cables. It is optional. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is used for connecting the GE ports on the S3528G LAN Switch and the S3928P-EI LAN switch when they are in a active/standby relationship.
Appearance
Figure 7-13 shows the LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Figure 7-13 LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch Connection
The LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is used when the S3528G LAN switch is configured with the GBIC-SX-MM850-A optical module and when the S3928P-EI LAN switch is configured with the SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. The SC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch and the LC/PC optical connector is connected to the S3928P-EI LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
CAUTION
The two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable interconnects the LAN switches or connects the LAN switch to the ODF, or another NE.
NOTE
A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.
7-28
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
Figure 7-14 shows a 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Figure 7-14 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.
One SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC singlemode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actual installation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528G LAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/another NE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch (S3528G) Connection
The SC/PC optical connectors of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connected to the S3528G LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable

This describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC multimode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode
7 RNC Cables
optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.
NOTE
Before using a pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables to replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multimode optical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, and put on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables to one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.
Appearance
Figure 7-15 shows an SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Figure 7-15 SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable
Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable that Connects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.
One SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly. For the installation positions, refer to lines to in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actual installation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528G LAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/another NE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or other transmission equipment.
Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for InterLAN Switch (S3528G) Connection
The SC/PC optical connectors of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connected to the S3528G LAN switch. For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93 and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.
7-30
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
7.16 RNC Crossover Cable

This describes the RNC crossover cable. The crossover cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It is mandatory. The number of the crossover cables to be configured is decided by the site requirements. The crossover cable interconnects the LAN switches.
Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows a crossover cable. Figure 7-16 Crossover cable
Pin Assignment
Figure 7-17 shows the pins at one end of the crossover cable. Figure 7-17 Pins of the crossover cable
Table 7-5 describes corresponding relationship between the pins at the two ends of the crossover cable. Table 7-5 Pins of the crossover cable X1 End X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 X1-4 X1-5
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue
X2 End X2-3 X2-6 X2-1 X2-4 X2-5
Wire Color White and green Green White and orange Blue White and blue
7-31
7 RNC Cables
X1 End X1-6 X1-7 X1-8
Wire Color Green White and brown Brown
X2 End X2-2 X2-7 X2-8
Wire Color Orange White and brown Brown
Installation
For the installation positions of the crossover cables, refer to lines 58, 59, 71, and 72 in2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
7.17 RNC Straight-Through Cable

This describes the RNC straight-through cable. The straight-through cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It is mandatory. The number of the straight-through cables to be configured is decided by the site requirements. The straight-through cable connects:
l l l l l l
The WMPU to the LAN switch The active and standby BAM servers to the LAN switches The LMT/hub to the LAN switches The WFEE/WFIE to the LAN switches The WFEE/WFIE to another NE The LAN switches to another NE
Appearance
Figure 7-18 shows a straight-through cable. Figure 7-18 Straight-through cable
Pin Assignment
Figure 7-19 shows the pins at one end of the straight-through cable.
7-32
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-19 Pins of the straight-through cable
Table 7-6 describes the pins at the two ends of a straight-through cable. Table 7-6 Pins of the straight-through cable X1 End X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 X1-4 X1-5 X1-6 X1-7 X1-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown X2 End X2-1 X2-2 X2-3 X2-4 X2-5 X2-6 X2-7 X2-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown
Installation
For the installation positions of the straight-through cables, refer to lines 3746, 79, 80, 89, 90, and 47 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 3138 in Connections of the WRBR signal cables in 3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet.
7.18 RNC Clock Signal Cable

This describes the signal cable of the RNC clock. The clock cable is a type of signal cables. It is optional. The clock cables are of two types. One type is used to send the timing signals to the WNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the WBIEb or the WOSEc in the WRBS is the Iu interface board. The other type is used to send the timing signals from the BITS clock source to the WNET/ WNETc in the WRSS when the RNC uses the BITS clock source.
Appearance
Figure 7-20 shows a clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc.
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-20 Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc
Figure 7-21 shows a BITS clock cable. Figure 7-21 BITS clock cable
Installation
For the installation positions of the clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/ WNETc, refer to line 92 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet. For the installation positions of the BITS clock cables, refer to lines 87 and 88 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
7.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal Cable

This describes the signal cable of the RNC alarm box. The signal cable of the alarm box is a type of signal cables. It is optional. The alarm box signal cable is used to send alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visible display.
Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The type which is actually used is decided by the site survey report. The following takes an alarm box signal cable with the DB9 connector as an example. Figure 7-22 shows an alarm box signal cable with the DB9 connector.
7-34
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-22 Alarm box signal cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-7 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable. Table 7-7 Pins of the alarm box signal cable RJ45 3 5 6 DB9 5 2 3
Installation
The RJ45 connector is connected to the input serial port of the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector is connected to the serial port of the LMT computer which is installed with the Alarm Management System. Figure 7-23 shows the installation position of the alarm box signal cable. Figure 7-23 Installation position of the alarm box signal cable
7.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXb

This describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. The signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb is the straight-through cable. Each GRU suite is configured with two signal cables. It is optional. It transmits the positioning information and PPS signals from the GRU suite to the WMUX/WMUXb and the GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb.
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
The two connectors of the signal cable are both RJ45. Figure 7-24 shows a signal cable that connects the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. Figure 7-24 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and WMUX/WMUXb
Pin Assignment
Table 7-8 describes the signals over the signal cable when the cable transmits positioning information and PPS signals. Table 7-8 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (1) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal WMUX/WMUXb Port 1PPS_RXD+ 1PPS_RXD TIME+ NC NC TIME NC NC Positive phase PPS signal received Negative phase 1PPS signal received Positive phase 8 kHz timing signal received Reserved Reserved Negative phase 8 kHz timing signal received Reserved Reserved GRU Suite Port 1PPS_TXD P 1PPS_TXD N 8 kHzP GND COM_RXD 8kHzN GND COM_TXD Positive phase PPS signal transmitted Negative phase 1PPS signal transmitted Positive phase 8 kHz timing signal transmitted Grounding signal COM port signal received Negative phase 8 kHz timing signal transmitted Grounding signal COM port signal transmitted
Table 7-9 describes the signals over the signal cable when the cable transmits GPS OM information.
7-36
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Table 7-9 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (2) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal WMUX/WMUXb Port TXD+ TXD RXD+ NC NC RXD NC NC Positive COM port signal transmitted Negative COM port signal transmitted Positive COM port signal received Reserved Reserved Negative COM port signal received Reserved Reserved GRU Suite Port RXDP RXDN TXDP NC NC TXDN NC NC Positive COM port signal received Negative COM port signal received Positive COM port signal transmitted Reserved Reserved Negative COM port signal transmitted Reserved Reserved
Installation
When the signal cable is used to transmit positioning information and PPS signals, one end of the cable is connected to the PPS1 port on the GRU suite and the other to the 1PPS port on the WMUX/WMUXb. When the signal cable is used to transmit OM information, one end of the cable is connected to the COM1 port on the GRU suite and the other to the COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb. For the installation positions of the signal cables, refer to lines 76, 14, 77, and 78 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.
NOTE
When the RNC is configured with only one GRU suite: The 1PPS port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 7 is connected to the PPS1 port on the GRU suite. The 1PPS port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 8 is connected to the PPS2 port on the GRU suite. The COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 7 is connected to the COM1 port on the GRU suite. The COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 8 is connected to the COM2 port on the GRU suite.
7.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETc

This describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. The signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc is the straight-through cable. It is optional. It transmits the synchronization timing signals from the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc and the GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7-37
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
The two connectors of the signal cable are both RJ45. Figure 7-25 shows a signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. Figure 7-25 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc
Pin Assignment
Table 7-10 describes the signals over the signal cable. Table 7-10 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc Pin No. 1 Signal WNET/WNETc Port 1PPS_RX D+ Positive phase PPS signal received Negative phase PPS signal received COM port signal transmitte d Grounding signal Grounding signal COM port signal received Reserved Reserved GRU Suite Port 1PPS_TXD P Positive phase PPS signal transmitted
1PPS_RX D
1PPS_TXD N
Negative phase PPS signal transmitted
RS232_T XD
RS232 RXD
COM port signal received
4 5 6
GND GND RS232_R XD NC NC
GND GND RS232_TX D NC NC
Grounding signal Grounding signal COM port signal transmitted
7 8
Reserved Reserved
Installation
For the installation positions of the signal cables, refer to lines 81 and 82 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE
7 RNC Cables
When the RNC is configured with only one GRU suite: The CLK IN0 port on the WNET/WNETc in slot 7 is connected to the CLK1 port on the GRU suite. The CLK IN0 port on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8 is connected to the CLK2 port on the GRU suite.
7.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power Distribution Box

This describes the monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box. The monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is a type of signal cables. It is mandatory. The monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is used to transmit monitoring signals from the power distribution box to the WRBS.
Appearance
The two connectors of the monitoring signal cable are both DB15. Figure 7-26 shows the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box. Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box
Pin Assignment
Table 7-11 describes the signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box. Table 7-11 Signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box Start X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 End X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.7 Meaning TX+ TXRX+ RXTwisted pair Remarks Twisted pair
Table 7-12 describes the signals listed in Table 7-11. Table 7-12 Signals Signal TX
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Pin Assignment Positive phase signal transmitted

7 RNC Cables
Signal TX RX RX
Pin Assignment Negative phase signal transmitted Positive phase signal received Negative phase signal received
Installation
For the installation positions of the monitoring signal cables of the power distribution box, refer to line 18 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and line 7 in 3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet.
7.23 RNC Power Cable

This describes the RNC power cable. The RNC power cables include the 48V power cables and the GND power cables. They are mandatory. Each cabinet must be configured with four power cables, two of which are 48V power cables and two of which are GND power cables. The power cables connect the PDF and the RNC cabinets.
Cable List
Table 7-13 lists the power cables that connect the RNC cabinet. Table 7-13 Power cables connecting the RNC cabinet Cable Name Color CrossSectio nal Area 25 mm2 Type and Installation Position of Connector 1 Cord end terminal/At the 48 V input of each RNC cabinet Cord end terminal/At the RTN input of each RNC cabinet Type and Installation Position of Connector 2
External 48 V power cable External GND power cable
Blue
OT terminal/At the 48 V output of the PDF OT terminal/At the GND output of the PDF
Black
25 mm2
NOTE
l l l
The minimum radius of bend of the power cables is 30 mm. Each cabinet is configured with two -48V power cables and two GND power cables. The lengths of the power cables shipped with the RNC are 6 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 50 m, and 60 m. The required lengths of the power cables are listed in the site survey report. The colors of the power cables listed here are just for reference. In case of special requirements, the colors can be changed to meet the requirements.
7-40
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
7 RNC Cables
Appearance
The power cables have the same appearance except the colors, as shown in Figure 7-27. Figure 7-27 RNC -48V/GND power cables
(1) Cord end terminal
(2) OT terminal
Installation
For details of installing the power cables, refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables.
7.24 RNC PGND Cable

This describes the RNC PGND cable. The PGND cable is mandatory. Each RNC is configured with one PGND cable. When RNC cabinets are combined, three PGND cables are added to connect two neighboring cabinets.
Cable List
Table 7-14 lists the PGND cables that connect the RNC cabinet. Table 7-14 PGND cables connecting the RNC cabinet Cable Name Color Cross Sectio nal Area 25 mm2 Min. Bending Radius Type and Installation Position of Connector 1 OT terminal/At the grounding bolt at the top back of each RNC cabinet OT terminal/At the PGND busbar of each RNC cabinet Type and Installation Position of Connector 2 OT terminal/At the PGND output of the PDF OT terminal/At the PGND busbar of each RNC cabinet Qua ntity
External PGND cable Intercabinet PGND cable
Green and yellow Green and yellow
30 mm
1 per cabin et 3 per cabin et
6 mm2
15 mm
Appearance
Figure 7-28 shows a PGND cable.
7 RNC Cables
Figure 7-28 PGND cable
(1) OT terminal
Installation
For details on how to install the PGND cable, refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables.
7-42
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8 LEDs on RNC Boards
8
About This Chapter
LEDs on RNC Boards
This describes the LEDs on the RNC boards and on the front panels of the power distribution box, GRU suite, and LAN switch. The RNC boards include the following types: the WBIE/ WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFIE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WMUX/ WMUXb, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, WSPUb, and WDMB. 8.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box This describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. 8.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite This describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite. 8.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G) This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports. 8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the power LED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports. 8.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb. 8.6 LEDs on the WEIE Board This describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WEIE. 8.7 LEDs on the WFEE Board This describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFEE. 8.8 LEDs on the WFIE Board
This describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFIE. 8.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board This describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. 8.10 LEDs on the WHPU Board This describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WHPU. 8.11 LED on the WLPU Board This describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board. 8.12 LEDs on the WMPU Board This describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMPU. 8.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb. 8.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board There are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc. 8.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb. 8.16 LEDs on the WOSEc Board There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc. 8.17 LEDs on the WSPUb Board There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb. 8.18 LEDs on the WDMB Board There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB.
8-2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box
This describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. Table 8-1 describes the LEDs. Table 8-1 LEDs on the power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s OFF Meaning The WDMB works properly and communicates with the WMUXb properly. The WDMB is not working or it does not communicate with the WMUXb properly. The power supply for the WDMB is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm concerning the power distribution box. The power distribution box is faulty. However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALM LED is always ON. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
ALM
Red
OFF ON
8.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite

This describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite. Table 8-2 describes the LEDs. Table 8-2 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite LED Color Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s RUN Green ON OFF ALM
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Meaning The GRU suite works properly. The power supply is normal but the GRU suite is faulty. The power supply is abnormal or the GRU suite is faulty. There is no alarm.
8-3
Red
OFF
LED
Color
Status ON ON
Meaning There is a fault alarm. The GRU suite obtains correct positioning information. The GRU suite cannot obtain correct positioning information.
ACT
Green OFF
8.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)

This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports. Table 8-3 describes the LEDs. Table 8-3 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch Name Label Col or Gree n Gree n Status ON OFF ON or OFF Meaning The LAN switch is powered on. The LAN switch is powered off. At any time, when either the A/L or the D/S LED is ON, the other LED must be OFF. If the A/L LED is ON and the D/S LED is OFF, you can infer that the 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports are in the ACTIVE/LINK mode. If the A/L LED is OFF and the D/S LED is ON, it is an indication that the 10M/100M Ethernet ports are in the DUPLEX/SPEED mode. There is traffic over the port. There is no traffic over the port. The port is in the LINK OK state (normal connection). The port is in LINK FAULT status (no connection) or in LINK ERROR status (connection error). The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode. The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode. The port provides the rate of 100 Mbit/ s.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Power LED
PWR
A/L Ethernet port state mode LED
D/S
Gree n
ON or OFF
LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports (when A/L LED is on, D/S LED is off, and ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode) LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports (when A/L LED is off, D/S LED is on, and
8-4
None
Yell ow
ON OFF ON
None
Gree n
OFF ON OFF ON
None
Yell ow Gree n
None
Name ports are in DUPLEX/SPEED mode)
Label
Col or
Status
Meaning
OFF ON OFF ON OFF
The port provides the rate of 10 Mbit/s. There is traffic over the port. There is no traffic over the port. A GBIC module is inserted in the port. No GBIC module is inserted in the port.
ACT LED of GBIC module port LINK
Yell ow Gree n
NOTE
After the S3528G LAN switch is powered on and initialized, the Ethernet port state mode LED A/L is on and the LED D/S is off. You can infer that the 10 M/100 M Ethernet ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode.
8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the power LED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/ 100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports. Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch. Table 8-4 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch Name Label Status Green; ON Meaning The LAN switch is operational. After the system is powered on, it is in self-test state or is downloading software. After the system is powered on, the self-test fails and the system is faulty. After the system is powered on, some ports fail to perform the self-test. The LAN switch is powered off. The DC power supply and the internal AC power are operational.
8-5
Power LED
PWR
Red; ON
OFF DC Power LED (PWR)

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
RPS
Green; ON
Name
Label
Status
Meaning The AC power supply is faulty or is disconnected, and the internal DC power is operational. The DC power supply is not connected. The PWR LED is green and flashing. The PWR LED is yellow and flashing. The PWR LED is red and on. The PWR LED is green and flashing. The PWR LED is red and on. Do not press the button. The self-test items from one to nine are displayed.
Yellow; ON
OFF During the selftest If the selftest fails, Digital display LED Unit Softwa re loadin g Fan failure
The failed self-test items are displayed.
During the software loading, a stub is rotating clockwise.
The letter F is displayed. The unit ID of the Fabric port is displayed. If the system is operational alone, the number 1 is displayed. Rate mode. The rate of the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port, 1000 Mbit/s SFP port, or Fabric port that uses 1000 Mbit/s SFP Duplex mode. The duplex information about the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port, 1000 Mbit/s SFP port, or Fabric port that uses 1000 Mbit/s SFP The rate of the port is 100 Mbit/s. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The rate of the port is 10 Mbit/ s.
Unit id
Green; ON Mode status LED
Mode
Yellow; ON
Green; ON 10Base-T/ 100BaseTX port LED None Rate mode Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; ON
8-6
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Name
Label
Status Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; ON Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz
Meaning The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port works in full-duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port works in half duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is neither receiving nor transmitting data. The rate of the port is 1000 Mbit/s. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port works in full-duplex mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test.
Duple x mode
OFF
Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF 1000BaseX SFP port LED Green; ON Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF Green; Flash at 3 Hz OFF
Rate mode
None Duple x mode
PoE mode
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8-7
Name
Label
Status
Meaning The 1000Base-X SFP port is receiving or transmitting data. The equipment is in IRF ring mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 1000Base-X SFP port is receiving or transmitting data. The equipment is in IRF link mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The Fabric port is faulty. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 1000Base-X SFP port works in full-duplex Fabric mode. The 10M/100M port is receiving or transmitting data. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is not connected. The 10M/100M port fails to perform the self-test. The 10M/100M port is neither receiving nor transmitting data.
Green; ON
Rate mode
Yellow; ON
Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz LED of the 1000BaseX SFP port when the 1000BaseX SFP port is set to Fabric mode Green; Flash at 3 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz None OFF
Green; ON
Duple x mode
Green; Flash at 1 Hz Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz OFF Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz
PoE mode
OFF
8.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb. Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.
8-8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Table 8-5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WBIE/WBIEb, this LED is always on because the WBIE/WBIEb does not work in active/standby mode. None
OFF
8.6 LEDs on the WEIE Board

This describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WEIE. Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the WEIE panel. Table 8-6 LEDs on the WEIE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8-9
LED ACT
Color Green
Status ON
Meaning For the WEIE, this LED is always on because the WEIE does not work in active/standby mode. None
OFF
8.7 LEDs on the WFEE Board

This describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFEE. Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the WFEE panel. Table 8-7 LEDs on the WFEE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WFEE, this LED is always on because the WFEE does not work in active/standby mode. None
OFF
8.8 LEDs on the WFIE Board

This describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFIE. Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the WFIE panel.
8-10
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Table 8-8 LEDs on the WFIE panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
8.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board

This describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel. Table 8-9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. For the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, this LED is always on because the WFMR/ WFMRb/WFMRc does not work in active/standby mode. None
8-11
OFF
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8.10 LEDs on the WHPU Board

This describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WHPU. Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the WHPU panel. Table 8-10 LEDs on the WHPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON for 2 s and OFF for 2s ON for 1 s and OFF for 5s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or flashing Meaning The board is active and functional.
The board is standby and functional.
The board is idle. This may occur only when the number of the active WHPUs that is configured on the LMT is smaller than the actual number minus 1. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
8.11 LED on the WLPU Board

This describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board. Table 8-11 describes the LED on the WLPU panel. Table 8-11 LED on the WLPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8-12
8.12 LEDs on the WMPU Board

This describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMPU. Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the WMPU panel. Table 8-12 LEDs on the WMPU panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
8.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb. Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel. Table 8-13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm.
8-13
Red
OFF
LED
Color
Status ON
Meaning There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
ACT
Green
ON OFF
8.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board

There are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc. Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel. Table 8-14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF CLK Green ON for 0.25 s and OFF for 0.25 s ON for 3 s and OFF for 1s ON for 1 s and OFF for 3s ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s ON OFF ACT Green ON OFF The clock sub-board on this board is active. The clock sub-board on this board is standby. Meaning The board is in normal operation. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The clock is in fast pull-in status. The clock is in locked status. The clock is in hold status. The clock is in free-run status. There is a fault alarm.
8.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb.
Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb panel. Table 8-15 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is active. In other modes, it indicates nothing. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is standby. In other modes, it indicates nothing.
OFF
8.16 LEDs on the WOSEc Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc. Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the WOSEc panel. Table 8-16 LEDs on the WOSEc panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s Meaning The board is in normal operation.
ON for 0.125 s and The board is in loading state. OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
8-15
LED ACT
Color Green
Status ON OFF
Meaning In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is active. In other modes, it indicates nothing. In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the board is standby. In other modes, it indicates nothing.
8.17 LEDs on the WSPUb Board

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb. Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the WSPUb panel. Table 8-17 LEDs on the WSPUb panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON ACT Green ON OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is active. The board is standby.
8.18 LEDs on the WDMB Board

There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB. Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the WDMB panel. Table 8-18 LEDs on the WDMB panel LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s Meaning The WDMB works properly and communicates with the WMUXb properly.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8-16
LED
Color
Status ON for 0.125 s and OFF for 0.125 s OFF
Meaning The WDMB is not working or it does not communicate with the WMUXb properly. The power supply for the WDMB is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm concerning the power distribution box. The power distribution box is faulty. However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALM LED is always ON. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
ALM
Red
OFF ON
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
8-17
9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards
9
About This Chapter
DIP Switches on RNC Boards
This describes the DIP switches on the following RNC boards: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFSM, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, and WDMB. 9.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board This describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the following DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12. 9.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board This describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. 9.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board This describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. 9.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board This describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board. 9.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board This describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board. 9.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board The WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch. 9.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board The WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch. 9.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board There is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switch S2 on its clock sub-board. 9.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board This describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9. 9.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board
The WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11. 9.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board The WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.
9-2
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the following DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12. Figure 9-1 shows the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb. Figure 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb
Table 9-1 describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb. Table 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON ON ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF
S17
1 2 3
Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 1623
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-3
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 58 S16 S15 S5 S6 S10 S11 S13 S14 S7 S8 S9 S12 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8
Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 2431 Reserved Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 03 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 47 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 811 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 1215 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 1619 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2023 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2427 Impedance selection switch of E1s/ T1s 2831 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16 23 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 24 31
9-4
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the unbalanced mode. In this case, the TX end is grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to ON. When the 120ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the balanced mode. In this case, the TX end is not grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to OFF. Whether in balanced or unbalanced mode, the RX end is not grounded. The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct. The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 9-1. The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 9-1.
l l l l l
9.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. Figure 9-2 shows the DIP switches on the WEIE. Figure 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE
NOTE
With two identical sub-boards, the WEIE has two groups of DIP switches of the same type, for example, two S1s, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-5
Table 9-2 describes the DIP switches on the WEIE. Table 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
S1
18
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 (1623) Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815 (2431) Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 015 (1631) TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07 (1623) TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815 (2431)
S2
18
ON
OFF
OFF
S3
1 2
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
S4
18
ON
OFF
OFF
S5
18
ON
OFF
OFF
NOTE
The DIP switches on the lower sub-board control links 015 and the DIP switches on the upper subboard control links 1631. For example, in Figure 9-2, the S4 on the lower sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07, and the S4 on the upper sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 1623. The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1 transport is used. Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable. Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.
l l l l l
9.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIP switches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5. Figure 9-3 shows the DIP switches on the WFEE.
Figure 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE
Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the WFEE. Table 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE DIP Swi tch S1 Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF Setting for 100-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
18
Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 07 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 815 Indication of impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 015 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 07
S2
18
ON
OFF
OFF
S3
1 2
ON ON ON
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
S4
18
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-7
DIP Swi tch S5
Bit
Description
Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON
18
TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 815
NOTE
l l l l l
The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1 transport is used. Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable. Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.
9.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board

This describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board. Figure 9-4 shows the DIP switch on the WFSM. Figure 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM
The DIP switch S1 has four bits. It is used to set the address of the WFSM. To set the address, pull out the fan drawer as described in the RNC Site Maintenance Guide. Then, set S1 as listed in Table 9-4. Table 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM DIP Switch S1 Bit 1, the least significant bit 2 3 4, the most significant bit Status ON OFF ON ON Meaning 0 1 0 0
9-8
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
CAUTION
In the RNC, the DIP switch on the WFSM must be set as listed in Table 9-4.
9.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board

This describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board. Figure 9-5 shows the DIP switch on the WHPU. Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU
Table 9-5 describes the DIP switch on the WHPU. Table 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU DIP Switc h S2 Bit Status Meaning Description
ON (default) OFF
The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode.
Operational status selection bit
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-9
DIP Switc h
Bit
Status
Meaning
Description
ON (default) OFF
The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled.
ON OFF (default)
In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit
ON (default) OFF
9.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board

The WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch. Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the WLPU. Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU
9-10
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Table 9-6 describes the DIP switch on the WLPU. Table 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF 3 ON OFF (default) 4 ON (default) OFF The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled. Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit Operation mode selection bit Description Operational status selection bit
9.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board

The WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch. Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the WMPU.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-11
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU
Table 9-7 describes the DIP switch on the WMPU. Table 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF 3 ON OFF (default) 4 ON (default) OFF The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled. Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit Operation mode selection bit Description Operational status selection bit
9-12
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board

There is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switch S2 on its clock sub-board. Figure 9-8 shows the DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc. Figure 9-8 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc
Table 9-8 describes the DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc. Table 9-8 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc Bit 1 Status ON (default) OFF 2 ON (default) OFF Meaning The board is in normal operation. The board is in debugging mode. The board is in the normal mode. The board is in the equipment test mode. Operation mode selection bit Description Operational status selection bit
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-13
Bit 3
Status ON OFF (default)
Meaning WRSS type selection bit
Description In the RNC, it is always set to OFF. Watchdog function selection bit
ON (default) OFF
The watchdog function is enabled. The watchdog function is disabled.
9.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board

This describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9. Figure 9-9 shows the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb. Figure 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb
Table 9-9 describes the settings and meanings of DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.
9-14
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
Table 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF
S3
14
S4
14
OFF
OFF
S5
14
ON
OFF
S6
14
OFF
OFF
S7 S8 S9
18 18 1 2
ON OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF ON
NOTE
l l l l
9.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board

The WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11. Figure 9-10 shows the DIP switches on the WOSEc.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-15
Figure 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc
Table 9-10 describes the switches on the WOSEc. Table 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm Coaxial Cable ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S11
14 14 14 14 18 18 1 2
9-16
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

NOTE
l l l l
9.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board

The WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch. Figure 9-11 shows the DIP switch on the WDMB. Figure 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB
With four bits, the DIP switch S2 is used to set the address of the WDMB. To set the address, pull out the WDMB as described in the Replacing an RNC Power Distribution Box. Then, set S2 as listed in Table 9-11. Table 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB DIP Switch S2 Bit 1, the most significant bit 2 3 4, the least significant bit Status ON ON ON ON Meaning "0" "0" "0" "0"
CAUTION
In the RNC, the DIP switch on the WDMB must be set as listed in Table 9-11.
Issue 03 (2008-08-30)
9-17

RNC Hardware Description - (V100R010 - 03)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RNC Hardware Description - (V100R010 - 03)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RNC V100R010

Issue Date Part Number

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR Cabinet....................................................................................2-71